2007 chevrolet aveo owner manual m - vaden gmpp chevrolet aveo owner manual m 1. headlamp aiming...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 13Safety Belts ............................................ 19Child Restraints ...................................... 39Airbag System ........................................ 68Restraint System Check ......................... 84

Features and Controls ................................ 87Keys ....................................................... 88Doors and Locks .................................... 94Windows ............................................... 101Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 103Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 107Mirrors .................................................. 124Storage Areas ...................................... 126Sunroof ................................................ 128

Instrument Panel ....................................... 129Instrument Panel Overview ................... 132Climate Controls ................................... 150Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators ................................... 157Secondary Information Center (SIC) ...... 175Audio System(s) ................................... 186

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 219Your Driving, the Road,

and Your Vehicle .............................. 220Towing ................................................. 257

Service and Appearance Care .................. 261Service ................................................. 264Fuel ...................................................... 266Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 273

2007 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M

1

Headlamp Aiming ................................. 309Bulb Replacement ................................ 309Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 318Tires ..................................................... 319Appearance Care .................................. 345Vehicle Identification ............................. 354Electrical System .................................. 355Capacities and Specifications ................ 368Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................ 369

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 371Maintenance Schedule .......................... 372

Customer Assistance Information ............. 401Customer Assistance and

Information ........................................ 402Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 419

Index .......................................................... 423

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and thename AVEO are registered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right to makechanges after that time without further notice. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name“General Motors of Canada Limited” for ChevroletMotor Division whenever it appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may not beequipped with all of them. For example, more thanone entertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15876628 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn aboutthe features and controls for the vehicle. Picturesand words work together in the owner manual toexplain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or “DoNot let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9Manual Lumbar (Sedan) ................................ 9Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Head Restraints .......................................... 12

Rear Seats .................................................... 13Rear Seat Operation (Sedan) ...................... 13Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback) ................ 15

Safety Belts .................................................. 19Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 19Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 23How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 24Driver Position ............................................. 25Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 32Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 33Right Front Passenger Position ................... 33Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 34Center Rear Passenger Position .................. 37Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 38Safety Belt Extender ................................... 38

Child Restraints ............................................ 39Older Children ............................................. 39Infants and Young Children ......................... 42

Child Restraint Systems .............................. 45Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 50Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 52Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 59Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 62Airbag System .............................................. 68

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 71When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 73What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 75How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 75What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 76Passenger Sensing System ......................... 77Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 82Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 83Restraint System Check ............................... 84

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 84

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Pull up and hold the barlocated under the front ofthe seat to unlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it and releasethe bar. Then try to move the seat with your body,to make sure the seat is locked into place.

8

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

To adjust the heightof the driver’s seatcushion, turn the knoblocated on the outboardside of the seatcushion.

Turn the knob forward to raise the height of theseat cushion and rearward to lower it.

Manual Lumbar (Sedan)Your vehicle may have manually operated lumbarsupport for the driver’s seat.

To adjust the front seat lumbar support, use thelever located on the outboard side of the seatback.

Push the lever down to adjust the support forthe lower part of the seatback. Pull the lever up toreturn the support to its original position.

9

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks.The lever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

10

To return the seatback to an upright position,do the following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job becauseit will not be against your body. Instead, itwill be in front of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

11

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechances of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower it,press the button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the head restraint down.

The front seat head restraints also tilt forward.To tilt the head restraint, first put it in the uprightposition by tilting it forward fully and releasing it.Then slowly move the head restraint forward until itis in the desired position.

12

The front head restraints can also be removed.To remove the restraint, press the button locatedon the top of the seatback, and lift the headrestraint from the guide sleeve. Replace the headrestraint before driving.

The rear seats have head restraints that areadjustable up and down, but they do not tilt.

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation (Sedan)

Folding the SeatbackThe rear seatbacks can be folded down toincrease cargo space.

To fold down the seatback, do the following:

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety beltsstill fastened may cause damage to the seat orthe safety belts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to their normal stowedposition before folding a rear seat.

1. Remove the safety belt strap from the safetybelt guide by pulling it through the slot.

2. Push the head restraints all the way down.

13

3. Pull up the release knob located on top of therear seatback.

4. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.

To return the seatback to the upright position,do the following:

1. Hook the safety belts into the safety beltguide.

2. Lift the seatback up and push it to its originalposition.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

3. Push down and rearward firmly on the top ofthe seatback until it latches securely in thefully upright position.

14

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

4. Insert the safety belt strap back into the safetybelt guide.

Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback)Folding the Rear SeatsThe rear seats can be folded to increase cargospace.To fold the rear seats, do the following:1. Lower the head restraints completely.2. Detach the center safety belt from the mini

buckle by pressing the black release buttonon the buckle.

3. Pull up the release knob, located on the top ofthe seatback, and fold the seatback forwardand down.

15

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.4. Move the safety belt buckles and safety belt

in the center seating position out of the spacebetween the seatback and the seat cushionso they are not in the way as the seat is beingfolded.

5. Pull the release handles on the rear side ofthe seat cushion to unlock the seat cushion.

6. Lift the seat cushion up and flip it forward.

7. Clip the hook to the front seat head restraintto keep the rear seat secure.

8. When the rear seat is folded, store the safetybelt buckles and center safety belt in thestorage area under the floor mat.

16

Unfolding the SeatsTo return the rear seats to the normal seatingposition, do the following:

1. Unclip the hook from the front seat headrestraint.

2. Remove the safety belt buckles and centerseat safety belt from the storage area.

Notice: Damage to the safety belt buckle orrear seat locking mechanism can occur if thesafety belt and buckles are pinched under therear seat cushion. Do not place the safety beltand buckles on the floor under the rear seatcushion when the rear seat is put back to thesitting position.

3. Push the seat cushion down to its originalposition until it latches securely. Try to pullup on the seat to make sure it is lockedin place.

4. Hook the safety belts in the outboard seatingpositions into the retaining clips.

17

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

5. Lift the seatback up and push it back to itsoriginal latched position.

6. Unhook the safety belts in the outboardseating positions from the retaining clips.

7. Return the safety belt buckles and the centerseat safety belt to their original positionbetween the rear seatback and the seatcushion. Make sure the straps of the safetybelt and buckles are not twisted.

8. Reattach the center seat safety belt to themini buckle. See Center Rear PassengerPosition on page 37.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

9. Push down and rearward firmly on the top ofthe seatback until it latches securely in thefully upright position.

18

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Lighton page 176.

19

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a person wouldnot survive. But most crashes are in between. Inmany of them, people who buckle up can surviveand sometimes walk away. Without belts they couldhave been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

20

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

21

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

22

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down.And your chance of being conscious duringand after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why shouldI have to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and willbe in most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Everyairbag system ever offered for sale hasrequired the use of safety belts. Even if you arein a vehicle that has airbags, you still have tobuckle up to get the most protection. That istrue not only in frontal collisions, but especiallyin side and other collisions.

23

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect you fromthings beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 39 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 42. Follow those rules for everyone’sprotection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

24

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 38.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustmenton page 32.

25

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

26

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

27


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

28


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

29


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

30


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

31

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of thebelt is centered on your shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder. Incorrect positioning of the shoulderbelt can reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressing therelease button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

32

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective is wearing themproperly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 25.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens,let the belt go back all the way and start again.

33

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted canbe thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And theycan strike others in the vehicle who are wearingsafety belts.

Rear Seat Outside PositionsLap-Shoulder BeltThe positions next to the windows havelap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear alap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

34

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Be sure you are using the correctbuckle and that the latch plate clicks wheninserted into the buckle.

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,tilt the latch plate and keep pulling untilyou can buckle it.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on thebuckle end of the belt as you pull up on theshoulder part.

35

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crashthis applies force to the strong pelvic bones. Andyou would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out ofthe retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

36

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Center Rear Passenger PositionYour vehicle has a retractable safety belt in thecenter rear seating position.

Here is how to use the center rear safety belt.

1. Pull the center rear safety belt from theretractor.

2. Push the latch plate at the end of the safetybelt strap into the buckle with the blackrelease button until the mechanism clicks.Make sure the strap is not twisted. The slidinglatch plate will face the front of the vehicle.

3. Pick up the sliding latch plate and pull the beltacross you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the red buckle.If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,tilt the latch plate and keep pulling untilyou can buckle it.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down thebuckle end of the belt as you pull up onthe shoulder part.

37

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are located on the retractorpart of the safety belts. They help the safetybelts reduce a person’s forward movement in amoderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activatein a crash, you will need to get new ones,and probably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 84.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in to orderit, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, anduse it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never use it forsecuring child seats. To wear it, just attach it to theregular safety belt. For more information see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

38

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restrainta shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touchingthe top of the thighs. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which could cause severeor even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

39

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle.If the child is sitting in the center rear seatpassenger position, move the child toward thesafety belt buckle. In either case, be sure thatthe shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,so that in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

40

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

41

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neitherthe distance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in theUnited States and in every Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must be restrained while ina vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children should notuse the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone, unlessthere is no other choice. Instead, they need to use achild restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it.For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

42

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not for

CAUTION: (Continued)


young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

43

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kinds ofrestraints available for children with specialneeds.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

44

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still sosmall that the vehicle’s regular safety beltmay not remain low on the hip bones, asit should. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made foruse in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

45

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of the infant.The harness system holds the infant in place and,in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in therestraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

46

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat canalso help a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to be used ina vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.Then follow the instructions for the restraint.You may find these instructions on the restraintitself or in a booklet, or both.

47

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 52 formore information. A child can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

48

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing thechild within the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

49

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat. We, therefore, recommend that childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, including aninfant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a childriding in a forward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag orairbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

50

There are a couple of things you need to knowabout using child restraints in your rear seat:

If you use a childrestraint in the centerrear seating position, thesafety belts and the childrestraint LATCH anchorsfor the rear outsideseating positions willnot be accessible.

Therefore, you will not be able to secure childrestraints or have passengers ride in therear outside seating positions.

If you use two childrestraints in the rearoutside seatingpositions, the safety beltfor the center rear seatposition will not beaccessible.

Therefore, you will not be able to secure a childrestraint or have a passenger ride in the centerrear seating position.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

51

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are madefor use with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never be installed using onlythe top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments. The followingexplains how to attach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

52

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. In the UnitedStates, some child restraints also have a top tether.Be sure to read and follow the instructions for yourchild restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for many childrestraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

53

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Each seating positionwith lower anchors hastwo labels, near thecrease between theseatback and the seatcushion, showing wherethe anchors are located.

Hatchback models may have zippers over thelower anchor areas. If so, unzip the seat coverbelow the labels to access each lower anchor.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located onthe trim cover.

For sedan models, the top tether anchors arelocated under the trim covers behind therear seat on the filler panel. Pull open thecover to access the top tether anchors.

Sedan

54

Be sure to use an anchor located on the same sideof the vehicle as the seating position where thechild restraint will be placed.

For hatchback models, the top tether anchors (B)are located in the rear cargo area, attachedto the back wall (A) of the vehicle. Squeezeand pull the front part of the plastic cover toaccess the top tether anchors. Remove thecargo shade before installing the top tether.

The cargo shade should remain off while the toptether is in use. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 50 for additional information.

Hatchback

55

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

56

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safety beltssecured may cause damage to the safety belt orthe seat. When removing the child restraint,always remember to return the safety belts totheir normal, stowed position before folding therear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions andthe instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint tothe lower anchors.

57

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Flip the cover to access the top tether

anchors.2.3. For hatchback models, remove the

cargo shade before installing the toptether. The cargo shade should remainoff while the top tether is in use.

2.4. Raise the head restraint if the desiredseating position has an adjustable headrestraint. See Head Restraints onpage 12.

2.5. Route and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

58

If the position you areusing has a headrestraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether under thehead restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether underthe head restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 52.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

If you need to install more than one child restraintin the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 50. There is not roomfor three child restraints in the rear seat, but youcan install two child restraints, one in eachrear outside seating position.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

59

3. Buckle the belt. Be sure the latch plate clickswhen you put it into the buckle. This means youare using the correct buckle. Also, make surethe release button is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly ifyou ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

60

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 52.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it.Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go backall the way. The safety belt will move freely againand be ready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

61

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 50.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system is designedto turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbagand side airbag (if equipped) when an infant in arear-facing infant seat or a small child in aforward-facing child restraint or booster seat isdetected. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 77 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 162 for more information on this includingimportant safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.


62


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and side airbag(if equipped), if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee thatan airbag or airbags will not deploy undersome unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. General Motorsrecommends that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag or airbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 8.

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 52.

There is no top tether anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat inthis position if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 52 if your childrestraint has a top tether.

63

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has airbags. See PassengerSensing System on page 77. General Motorsrecommends that rear-facing child restraints besecured in a rear seat, even if the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and side airbag(if equipped) is off. If your child restraint isforward-facing, move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing the child restraint in thisseat. See Manual Seats on page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and side airbag (if equipped), the offsymbol in the passenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit when you turn theignition to ON or START. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 162.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

64

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

65

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt. Youshould not be able to pull more of the belt fromthe retractor once the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off symbolon the instrument panel near the clock will belit and stay lit when the key is turned toON or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the offsymbol is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

66

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers heaters or massagers, located betweenthe seat cushion and the child restraint or smalloccupant, can affect how the passenger sensingsystem operates. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat cushion before reinstalling/securingthe child restraint or small occupant.

If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the childin the child restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

67

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driveranda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags.Side impact airbags are available for the driver andright front passenger.

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for thedriver and/or the right front passenger, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on theside of the seatback closest to the door.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.But these airbags must inflate very quickly to dotheir job and comply with federal regulations.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontal


68


crashes. They are not designed to inflatein rollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Side impact airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Front occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door.

69

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbagsplus lap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 39 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 42.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel clusteror the secondaryinformation center,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lightin the Index for more information.

70

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

71

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for thedriver, it is in the side of the driver’s seatbackclosest to the door.

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for theright front passenger, it is in the side of thepassenger’s seatback closest to the door.

72

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anything betweenan occupant and an airbag, and do notattach or put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any other airbagcovering. Do not let seat covers block theinflation path of a side impact airbag.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into awall that does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel is about 9 to 14 mph (14 to 23 km/h). Thethreshold level can vary, however, with specificvehicle design, so that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.

73

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

The frontal airbags (driver and right frontpassenger) are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 68. Sideimpact airbags are intended to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes. A side impact airbag willinflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.” The threshold levelcan vary with specific vehicle design. Side impactairbags are not intended to inflate in frontal ornear-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.A side impact airbag is intended to deploy on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angle ofthe impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows downin frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impactairbags, inflation is determined by the location andseverity of the impact.

74

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle is in acrash. The sensing system triggers a release ofgas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.The inflator, the airbag and related hardware are allpart of the airbag modules. Frontal airbag modulesare located inside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For seating positions with sideimpact airbags, there are also airbag modules in theside of the seatbacks closest to the door.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderateto severe side collisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbagssupplement the protection provided by safety belts.

Airbags distribute the force of the impact moreevenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbagswould not help you in many types of collisions,including rollovers, rear impacts, and many sideimpacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion isnot toward the airbag. Side impact airbags wouldnot help you in many types of collisions, includingmany frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, andrear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’sfrontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe sidecollisions for vehicles with side impact airbags.

75

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal airbag, the instrument panel for the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, and for seatingpositions with side impact airbags, the side of theseatback closest to the door — may be hot for ashort time. The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, but not too hot totouch. There may be some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbaginflation does not prevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps onwhen the airbags inflate and turn on the hazardwarning flashers. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers on by using the controls for thosefeatures.

76

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occurfrom the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After they inflate, you will need some new partsfor your airbag system. If you do not get them,the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 414.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible when youturn your ignition key to ON or START.

If you have a sedan, the airbag off symbol will bevisible near the clock, located in the center ofthe instrument panel, during the system check.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator (Sedan)on page 162.

United States – Sedan Canada – Sedan

77

If you have a hatchback, the airbag off symbol willbe visible in the Secondary Information Center(SIC) during the system check. See SecondaryInformation Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only)on page 175. When the system check is complete,the airbag off symbol will be visible under certainconditions.

The passenger sensing system will turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag and side impactairbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.The driver’s airbags are not part of the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with asensor that is part of the right front passenger’sseat cushion. The sensor is designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant and

determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped) should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear, rather than thefront seat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that accommodates arear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates.


United States –Hatchback

Canada – Hatchback

78


This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be veryclose to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag orairbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped) if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped), the off symbol willlight and stay lit to remind you that the airbag orairbags are off. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator (Sedan) on page 162.

79

If a child restraint has been installed and the offsymbol is not lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 62.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the off symbol is still not lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the off symbol is still not lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped)anytime the system senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in the right front

passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag or airbags tobe enabled, the off symbol will not light.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped), depending upon theperson’s seating posture and body build. Everyonein your vehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whetheror not there is an airbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off symbol is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens do the following:

Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to placethe seatback in the fully upright position, thensit upright in the seat, centered on the seatcushion, with the person’s legs comfortablyextended. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about two minutes.This allows the system to detect that person andthen enable the passenger’s airbag or airbags.

80

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right front passenger’sseat may not have the protection of thefrontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped).See Airbag Readiness Light on page 176for more on this, including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagers canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material from theseat cushion before reinstalling or securingthe child restraint or small occupant.

81

You might want to consider not using seat covers orother aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has thepassenger sensing system. See Adding Equipmentto Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 83 formore information about modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in severalplaces around your vehicle. You do not want thesystem to inflate while someone is working on yourvehicle. Your dealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing your vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 421.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned off and the battery isdisconnected, an airbag can still inflateduring improper service. You can beinjured if you are close to an airbag whenit inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of the airbagsystem. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified todo so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

82

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, they may keep theairbag system from working properly. Also, theairbag system may not work properly if yourelocate any of the airbag sensors. If you haveany questions about this, you should contactCustomer Assistance before you modify yourvehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer SatisfactionProcedure on page 402.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel, theinstrument panel, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 402.

83

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safety beltsystem parts. If you see anything that might keepa safety belt system from doing its job, have itrepaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 348.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, or an airbag covering (if equipped) on aseatback, the airbag may not work properly.

You may have to replace the airbag module inthe steering wheel, both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag, or both the airbagmodule and the seatback for seating positionswith a side impact airbag (if equipped.) Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

84

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part about the airbagsystem earlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’ssafety belt pretensioners and safety belt. Be sureto do so. Then the new pretensioner and safetybelt will be there to help protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand right front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and right front passenger’ssafety belt retractor assemblies contain the safetybelt pretensioners. Have your safety beltpretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in acollision, or if your airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 176.

85

✍ NOTES

86

Keys .............................................................. 88Remote Keyless Entry System .................... 90Remote Keyless Entry System Operation .... 91

Doors and Locks .......................................... 94Door Locks ................................................. 94Central Door Unlocking System ................... 95Door Ajar Reminder .................................... 96Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 96Lockout Protection ....................................... 97Trunk .......................................................... 98Liftgate (Hatchback) ................................... 100

Windows ...................................................... 101Manual Windows ....................................... 102Power Windows ........................................ 102Sun Visors ................................................ 103

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 103Theft-Deterrent System .............................. 103Immobilizer ................................................ 106Immobilizer Operation ................................ 106

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 107New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 107Ignition Positions ....................................... 108Starting the Engine .................................... 109

Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 110Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 111Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 115Parking Brake ........................................... 117Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 118Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 119Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transaxle) ................................ 120Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 121Engine Exhaust ......................................... 122Running the Engine While Parked ............. 122

Mirrors ......................................................... 124Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 124Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 124Outside Power Mirror ................................ 125Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 126Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 126

Storage Areas ............................................. 126Glove Box ................................................. 127Cupholder(s) .............................................. 127Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............. 127

Sunroof ....................................................... 128

Section 2 Features and Controls

87

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. Donot leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

88

One key is used for theignition, the doors andall other locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealerremoves the key tag and gives it to the first owner.The tag has a code on it that tells your dealer howto make extra keys. For vehicle security, keep thekey tag in a safe place and also record the keynumber somewhere other than inside of the vehicle.If you lose your key, you will be able to have a newone made easily using the tag.

Your vehicle may have an electronic immobilizerdesigned to protect your car against theft. If so, onlykeys with the correct electronic code can be used tostart the vehicle. See Immobilizer Operation onpage 106 for additional information. Even if a keyhas the same profile, it will not start the engine if theelectronic code is incorrect. If you need a new key,contact your dealer who can obtain the correct keycode. Also see Roadside Assistance Program onpage 408.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

89

Remote Keyless Entry SystemIf the vehicle has the keyless entry system, itoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any remote keyless entry system.If the transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 91.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

90

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationYou can lock and unlock your vehicle’s doors fromabout 20 ft (6 m) away using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the RKE system:

Hatchback

Q (Lock): Press this button to lock all of thedoors. If all of the doors and the trunk or liftgate areclosed, the hazard lamps will flash once and thehorn will chirp to indicate that locking has occurredand that the theft-deterrent system is active.

K (Unlock): Press this button to unlock all of thedoors. The hazard lamps will flash twice to indicatethat unlocking has occurred and that thetheft-deterrent system is deactivated.

Hatchback Sedan

91

Sedan

n (Lock/Unlock): Press this button to lock all ofthe doors. The hazard lamps will flash once toindicate that locking has occurred and that thetheft-deterrent system is active. Press this buttonagain to unlock all of the doors. The hazard lampswill flash twice to indicate that unlocking hasoccurred and that the theft-deterrent systemis deactivated.

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and holdthis button for approximately one second toopen the trunk.

The LED light, on the transmitter, will flash whenthe buttons on the transmitter are pressed.

The lock and unlock buttons will not operate andthe theft-deterrent system will not activate while thekey is in the ignition.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Remember tobring any remaining transmitters with you whenyou go to your dealer. When the dealer matchesthe replacement transmitter to your vehicle,any remaining transmitters must also be matched.Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.Each vehicle can have a maximum of fivetransmitters matched to it.

92

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about two years.

The battery is weak if the LED fails to illuminate or ifthe transmitter will not work at the normal range inany location. If you have to get close to your vehiclebefore the transmitter works, it is probably time tochange the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Static fromyour body transferred to these surfaces maydamage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter, dothe following:

1. Remove the screw from the back of the coverand open the cover of the transmitter.

2. Pull the transmitter out of the cover andcarefully detach the sticker from the unit. Keepthe sticker clean.

3. Remove the battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive side of thebattery faces up. Use one three-volt, CR1620,or equivalent, type battery.

4. Attach the sticker and put the transmitter unitin the cover.

5. Put the two halves back together and replacethe screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

6. Test the transmitter operation.

Hatchback Sedan

93

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked,the handle will not open it. Youincrease the chance of being thrownout of the vehicle in a crash if the doorsare not locked. So, wear safety beltsproperly and lock the doors wheneveryou drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry System Operation on page 91.

94

To manually unlock the front doors from theoutside, insert the key and turn it toward the frontof the vehicle. To manually lock the doors fromthe outside, insert the key and turn it towardthe rear of the vehicle.

All doors, except for the driver’s door, can belocked by pushing down the manual door lockand then closing the door. The driver’s door canonly by locked from the outside by using the key orthe optional remote keyless entry transmitter.

From the inside, you can lock and unlock all of thedoors by pushing or pulling the manual doorlock located on each door.

Central Door Unlocking SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with the centraldoor unlocking system. This system is activatedfrom the driver’s door.

From the outside, you can lock or unlock all thedoors by using either the key or the remotekeyless entry transmitter, if equipped. From theinside, you can lock or unlock all the doorsby using the driver’s door lock switch while thedriver’s door is closed.

95

Door Ajar Reminder

If one of the doors onthe sedan is not closedproperly while theignition is on, thedoor ajar light on theinstrument panel comeson and stays on until thedoors are closed.

If one of the doors on the hatchback is not closedproperly while the ignition is on, the door ajarlight on the secondary information center comeson and stays on until the doors are closed.

Rear Door Security Locks

Your vehicle has reardoor security locks oneach rear door that helpprevent passengersfrom opening therear doors on yourvehicle from the inside.

Using the Rear Door Security Lock1. Move the lever upward to lock.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.

Notice: Pulling the inside door handle whilethe rear door security locks are engaged coulddamage your vehicle. Do not pull the insidedoor handle while the rear door security locksare engaged.

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be openedfrom the inside while this feature is in use.

96

Opening a Rear Door When theSecurity Lock is On1. Unlock the door from the inside.

2. Open the door from the outside.

If you do not cancel the security lock, adults or olderchildren who ride in the rear will not be able to openthe rear door from the inside. You should let adultsand older children know how to cancel the locks.

Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock1. Unlock the door from the inside and open

the door from the outside.

2. Move the lever downward to unlock.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

The rear door locks will now work normally.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature helps prevent locking your key in thecar. The driver’s door can only be locked withthe door closed. From the outside of the vehicle,close the driver’s door and lock it using the key orthe remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.

This feature cannot guarantee that you willnever be locked out of your vehicle. Alwaysremember to take your key with you.

97

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway.

See Engine Exhaust on page 122.

To open the trunk on your sedan from outside ofyour vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinderand turn the key clockwise or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter, if equipped.

Remote Trunk Release

If your vehicle has atrunk release buttonlocated on the driver’sdoor, you can open thetrunk from inside yourvehicle by pressing therelease button.

When closing the trunk, close from the center toensure it fully latches.

Trunk Release Button

98

If your vehicle has atrunk release leverlocated on the outboardside of the driver’s seat,you can open the trunkfrom inside your vehicleby pulling the releaselever.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located on the underside of thetrunk lid. This handle will glow following exposureto light. Pull the release handle down to openthe trunk from the inside.

Trunk Release Lever

99

Liftgate (Hatchback)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the liftgate open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System on page 150.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 122.

To open the liftgate on your hatchback from outsideof the vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinderand turn it counterclockwise or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter, if equipped. Then pull upthe handle above the license plate to open theliftgate.

When closing the liftgate, close from the center toensure it fully latches.

To lock the liftgate, insert the key into the lockcylinder and turn it clockwise or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter, if equipped.

The liftgate can also be locked or unlocked by thecentral door unlocking system or remote keylessentry, if equipped. See Central Door UnlockingSystem on page 95 and Remote KeylessEntry System Operation on page 91.

100

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

101

Manual WindowsUse the window crank to open and close eachwindow.

The rear windows do not open fully.

Power Windows

If your vehicle has power windows, the switches arelocated on the driver’s door. In addition, eachpassenger door has a switch for its own window.

The ignition must be turned to ON to use thepower windows. To lower the window, press andhold the switch. To raise the window, lift upon the switch. Release the switch when thewindow reaches the desired level.

Window Lockout

The window lockout islocated with the driver’spower window switches.

Press the lockout button to stop the front and rearpassengers from using their window switches.The driver can still operate all the windows withthe lockout on. Press the lockout button againto return to normal window operation.

102

Sun VisorsTo block out glare you can swing down the visors.You can also remove them from the center mountand swing them to the side.

Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle has vanity mirrors located on theback of the sun visors. Swing down the sun visorto expose the vanity mirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Theft-Deterrent SystemYour vehicle may have a theft-deterrent system.

The theft-deterrent system will not arm whenyou lock the doors using the key or the manualdoor lock. It arms only when you use the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

Arming the SystemTo arm the system, do the following:

1. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, andthe trunk or liftgate.Ensure that the windows are closed, as thesystem can be armed even if the windowsare open.

2. Turn the key to LOCK and remove the keyfrom the ignition.If the key is inserted in the ignition, thetransmitter will not arm the theft-deterrentsystem.

103

3. Lock the doors by pressing the lock button onthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

• The LED light on the transmitter willflash once.

• All of the doors will lock.

• The hazard warning lamps will flash onceand the horn will chirp.

• The security light will flash to indicate thatthe theft-deterrent system is armed. Forhatchback models, the security light islocated on the secondary informationcenter (SIC) on the center of the instrumentpanel. See Secondary Information Center(SIC) (Hatchback Only) on page 175. Forsedan models, the security light is located onthe center of the instrument panel near theclock. See Instrument Panel Overview onpage 132.

To avoid activating the alarm by accident, do oneof the following:

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front doorusing the key.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

Unlocking a door any other way will activate thealarm when a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened.

If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrentsystem, lock the vehicle using the key or themanual door locks.

104

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system, do one of the following:

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s frontdoor using the key.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

− The LED light on the transmitter willflash once.

− All of the doors will unlock.− The hazard warning lamps will

flash twice.

If the door is not opened or if the engine is notstarted within 30 seconds after disarming thesystem using the transmitter, all of the doors willautomatically lock and the theft-deterrent mode willrearm.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened withoutusing the key or the remote keyless entrytransmitter, the horn will sound and the lamps willflash for up to 30 seconds.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmIf the system alarm is active, it can be deactivatedusing one of the following methods:

• Press the lock or unlock buttons on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front doorusing the key.

Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after30 seconds. The system will then lock thedoors and rearm the theft-deterrent system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf the hazard warning lamps flash once when youpress the lock or unlock buttons on the remotekeyless entry transmitter, the theft-deterrentsystem alarm was activated while you were away.

105

ImmobilizerThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:


2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Immobilizer OperationYour vehicle may have a passive theft-deterrentsystem. The immobilizer system preventsyour vehicle from being started by unauthorizedpersons.

If your vehicle has an immobilizer system, yourvehicle has a special key that works with thetheft-deterrent system. There is a transponder inthe key head that is electronically coded. Thecorrect key will start the vehicle. An invalidkey immobilizes the engine. The immobilizersystem isolates the power supply to the ignitionsystem, the fuel pump and the fuel injectors.

The engine immobilizer is activated after the key isturned to LOCK and removed from the ignition.The security light located on the top center of theinstrument panel in the secondary informationcenter will flash when the immobilizer is active.If the light does not flash after removing the key,have the system checked by your dealer.

If the immobilizer system does not recognize theelectronic code when the key is turned to START,the engine will not start and the security indicatorwill continue blinking. If your key is ever damaged,you may not be able to start your vehicle.

106

When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine doesnot start and the security light continues flashing,the key may have a damaged transponder.Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another key. At thistime, you may also want to check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers on page 356. If theengine still does not start with the other key, yourvehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start,the first key may be faulty. See your dealer whocan have a new key made.

Up to five keys may be programmed for thevehicle. If you lose or damage your keys, only aGM dealer can have new keys made.

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you will be able to restart yourengine if you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system,however, is not working properly and must beserviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is notprotected by the theft-deterrent system at this time.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 408.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

107

Ignition Positions

With the key in theignition switch, you canturn the key to fourdifferent positions.

{CAUTION:

On manual transaxle vehicles, turning thekey to LOCK and removing it will lock thesteering column and result in a loss ofability to steer the vehicle. This couldcause a collision. If you need to turn theengine off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key only to ACC. Do not push thekey in while the vehicle is moving.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

LOCK: This position locks your steering wheel,ignition, shift lever and transaxle. This is theonly position in which you can insert or removethe key. For easier key operation when unlockingthe steering wheel, move the steering wheelfrom right to left and turn the key to ACC.

ACC (Accessory): This position operates someof your electrical accessories, such as theradio, but not the climate control system.

ON: This is the position to which the switch returnsafter you start your engine and release the key. Theswitch stays in ON when the engine is running. Buteven when the engine is not running, you can useON to operate your electrical accessories, and todisplay some instrument panel warning lights.

108

START: This position starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key. The switch will returnto ON for normal driving. Do not turn the key toSTART if the engine is running.

Even if the engine is not running, ACC and ONallow you to operate electrical accessories,such as the radio.

Starting the Engine

Automatic TransaxleMove the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).The engine will not start in any other position — thatis a safety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shiftinto PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and theparking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal tothe floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will notstart if the clutch pedal is not all the waydown — that is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go downas your engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longerthan 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damage your starter motor.Wait about 15 seconds between each try to helpavoid draining your battery or damaging yourstarter.

2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds andtry again to start the engine by turning theignition to START. Wait about 15 secondsbetween each try.When the engine has run about 10 seconds towarm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven.Do not run your engine at high speed when itis cold.If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C),let the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.

109

3. If the engine still will not start, or starts butthen stops, it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holding it there as youhold the key in START for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing, but this time keep the pedaldown for five or six seconds. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, theengine coolant heater can help. You will get easierstarting and better fuel economy during enginewarm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should beplugged in a minimum of four hours prior to startingyour vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C),use of the coolant heater is not required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment, nearthe battery.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt ACoutlet.

110

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.

Automatic Transaxle Operation

If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, theshift lever is located on the console betweenthe seats.

Movement between certain positions requirespushing the release button on the front ofthe shifter.

111

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 118.

Ensure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle hasan automatic transaxle shift lock control system.

You have to apply your regular brakes before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the key is in ON. Ifyou cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holding thebrake pedal down, see Shifting Out of Park (P) onpage 119.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

When shifting from NEUTRAL (N) toREVERSE (R), you need to apply the regularbrake and push the release button on the front ofthe shifter and then forward.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, orSnow on page 247.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whileyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

112

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeeds when shifting your vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4): This position isfor normal driving.

When operating your vehicle in severe coldconditions, the transaxle may be prevented fromshifting into D4 gear until the transaxle fluidhas warmed up to it’s operational temperature.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up ratherslowly or not shift gears when you go faster,and you continue to drive your vehicle that way,you could damage the transaxle. Have yourvehicle serviced right away. You can drive inSECOND (2) when you are driving lessthan 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D4) for higher speeds until then.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more powerbut lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2)on hills. It can help control your speed as yougo down steep mountain roads, but then youwould also want to use your brakes off and on.

Notice: Do not drive in SECOND (2) at speedsover 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage thetransaxle. Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D4) asmuch as possible. Do not shift into SECOND (2)unless you are going slower than 65 mph(105 km/h) or you can damage your engine.

113

FIRST (1): This position gives you even morepower but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2).You can use it on very steep hills, or in deepsnow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1),the transaxle will not shift into first gear untilthe vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

If there is a malfunction with the automatictransaxle, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) orthe HOLD indicator light will turn on or flash. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 181 or HoldMode Light on page 181.

Have your vehicle fixed as soon as possible.

Hold ModeIf your vehicle’s transaxle has hold mode, you canselect this mode to drive with some characteristicsof a manual transaxle. With hold mode turnedon, the automatic transaxle will stay in a specificgear range.

Press the HOLD button on the shift lever consoleto turn on hold mode. Press the button againto turn off hold mode, and return to normalautomatic transaxle operation.

114

For the Hatchback, the HOLD light will light up onthe secondary information center. For the Sedan,the HOLD light will light up on the instrument panelcluster. See Hold Mode Light on page 181.

When hold mode is activated, the transaxle isfixed in the gear selected.

Hold Mode FeaturesWinter FunctionSelect hold mode while in AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D4) to help the vehicle maintaintraction on slippery road surfaces, such as snow,mud, or ice.

Manually Controlling ShiftSelect hold mode to use your automatic transaxlelike a three-speed manual transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Operation

Five-Speed

This is your shift pattern.

Here is how to operate your manual transaxle:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shiftinto FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

115

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up onthe clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down.Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as youlet up on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the sameway you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, andshift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down theclutch pedal, lift up the ring on the shift lever andshift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parkingbrake, for parking your vehicle.

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others. Donot shift down more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

116

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between thebucket seats.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 164.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release button inas you move the brake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verifythat the parking brake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off before driving.

117

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushingthe release button on the front of the shfiter.

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) andyour parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from PARK (P). Ifyou can, it means that the shift lever was not fullylocked into PARK (P).

118

Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into PARK (P) properly before youleave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) on page 118.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill to takesome of the pressure from the parking pawl in thetransaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out ofPARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your automatic transaxle vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift-lock control system. You have to fullyapply your regular brakes before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition is turned to ON. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 111.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holdingthe brake pedal down, try this:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.

3. Remove the cover over the shift-lock releaseslot by prying it off using a small, flat object.The shift-lock release slot is located at the topof the shift lever.

119

4. Insert the key into the shift-lock release slotand press and hold the key.

5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

6. Remove the key from the shift-lock releaseslot, insert the key into the ignition and startthe engine.

7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.

8. Apply and hold the regular brake fullyand release the parking brake.

9. Shift to the gear you want.

10. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transaxle)Before leaving your vehicle, do the following:

1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly applythe parking brake.

2. Fully press in the clutch pedal and place theshift lever into the gear position as statedbelow:

• When parking on level ground, place theshift lever into NEUTRAL.

• When parking downhill, place the shift leverin REVERSE (R).

• When parking uphill, place the shift lever inFIRST (1).

3. After shifting, turn the ignition to LOCK,remove the key and release the clutch.

120

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

121

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.



• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

122

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 122.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 242.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transaxle shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to. Ifyou have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transaxle shiftlever to PARK (P), or the manual transaxleshift lever to NEUTRAL.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. If you have an automatic transaxle,see Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)on page 118.

123

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjustthe mirror so you can see clearly behind yourvehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up ordown and side to side. The control at the bottom ofthe mirror is the day/night feature that allowsadjustment to the mirror so that the glare ofheadlamps from behind is reduced. Push thecontrol for daytime use; pull it for night use.

Outside Manual MirrorsThe outside rearview mirrors should be adjusted soyou can see a little of the side of your vehicle whenyou are sitting in a comfortable driving position.

Adjust the outside manual mirrors using thecontrol lever located next to the mirror.

The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flatagainst the side of the vehicle by pushingthem toward the vehicle’s doors.

124

Outside Power Mirror

For sedan models, thecontrol for the powermirrors is located on theinstrument panel, leftof the steering wheel.

To adjust the mirrors, do the following:

1. Select the mirror you want to adjust by movingthe selector switch to L for the driver’s sidemirror or R for the passenger’s side mirror.

2. To adjust the mirror, press the correspondingedges located on the four-way control pad tomove the mirror in the direction that you want itto go - up, down, left or right. The ignition mustbe turned to ON to adjust the mirrors.

For hatchback models,the control for the powermirror is located onthe driver’s door panel,above the powerwindow buttons.

1. Select the mirror you want to adjust bypressing the left side of the selector forthe driver’s side mirror or the right side forthe passenger’s side mirror.

2. To adjust each mirror, press the correspondingedges located on the four-way control pad tomove the mirror in the direction that youwant it to go. The ignition must be turned toON to adjust the mirrors.The outside rearview mirrors can be foldedflat against the side of the vehicle by pushingthem toward the vehicle’s doors.

125

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things,like other vehicles, look farther away than theyreally are.

Outside Heated MirrorsIf your vehicle has this feature, when you operatethe rear window defogger, the heated driver’s andpassenger’s outside power mirrors are warmed tohelp clear them of ice, snow, and condensation.See “Rear Window and Outside Mirror Defogger”under Climate Control System on page 150 formore information.

Storage Areas

Your vehicle has shopping hooks on each frontseatback for your convenience. Lift the headrest toaccess the hooks.

126

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling the bottom of thehandle upward.

Cupholder(s)

There are two cupholders located in the centerinstrument panel, below the climate control system.To use the cupholder, push in on its outer edge.Then pull out the cupholder. After use, push in thecupholder until it latches.

There is also a cupholder located in the rear ofthe center console.

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

If your vehicle has this feature, the sunglassesstorage compartment is located above the driver’sdoor. To open, pull down and hold the upperpart of the cover. To close the compartment, letgo of the cover and the compartment willautomatically close.

127

Sunroof

If the vehicle has thisfeature, the switch islocated on the headlinerbetween the sun visors.

The sunroof will only operate when the ignition isturned to ON. The sunroof can be opened to avent position or it can be opened all of the way.

You must manually open and close the sunshade.

To open the sunroof to the vent position, openthe sunshade. Then press and hold the driver’sside of the switch. To close the sunroof, press andhold the passenger’s side of the switch until thesunroof reaches the desired position.

To fully open the sunroof, open the sunshade. Thenpress and hold the passenger’s side of the switch.To close the sunroof, press and hold the driver’sside of the switch. The sunroof will stop if the switchis released during operation.

In both the vent and fully open positions, the airflow can be adjusted by pushing and holdingthe switch until the sunroof moves to the desiredposition.

The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if thevehicle has an electrical failure.

128

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 132Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 135Other Warning Devices ............................. 136Horn .......................................................... 136Tilt Wheel .................................................. 136Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 137Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 137Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 138Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 138Windshield Wipers ..................................... 138Windshield Washer .................................... 140Rear Window Wiper/Washer (Hatchback) .... 140Cruise Control ........................................... 141Exterior Lamps .......................................... 145Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 145Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 146Fog Lamps ................................................ 147Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 147Dome Lamp .............................................. 148Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ............... 148Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 148Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 149Clock ......................................................... 150

Climate Controls ......................................... 150Climate Control System ............................. 150Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 154Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 155

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 157Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 158Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 160Trip Odometer ........................................... 160Tachometer ............................................... 160Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 161Safety Belt Reminder Tone ....................... 161Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 161Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 162Charging System Light .............................. 164Brake System Warning Light ..................... 164Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 165Hold Mode Light ........................................ 166Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 167Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 168Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 171Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 172Cruise Control Light .................................. 172Highbeam On Light ................................... 172

Section 3 Instrument Panel

129

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light ........................................ 172

Door Ajar Light .......................................... 173Fuel Gage ................................................. 173Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 174

Secondary Information Center (SIC) .......... 175Secondary Information Center (SIC)

(Hatchback Only) ................................... 175Clock (Hatchback Only) ............................. 176Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 176Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 176Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

(Hatchback) ............................................ 178Charging System Light .............................. 180Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 180Hold Mode Light ........................................ 181Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 181Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 185Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 186Door Ajar Light .......................................... 186

Audio System(s) ......................................... 186AM-FM Radio (Single Display,

Base Level) ........................................... 188AM-FM Radio (Double Display,

Base Level) ........................................... 190Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) ....................... 194Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3/WMA) ......... 201Using an MP3

(Radio with CD Player) .......................... 208Using an MP3

(Radio with Six-Disc Player) ................... 212Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 216Radio Reception ........................................ 217Care of Your CDs ..................................... 217Care of the CD Player .............................. 217Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback) ............... 218Backglass Antenna (Sedan) ....................... 218

Section 3 Instrument Panel

130

✍ NOTES

131

Instrument Panel Overview

United States Hatchback shown, Canada Hatchback similar

132

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 154.B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument

Panel Cluster on page 158.C. Digital Clock and Secondary Information

Center. See Clock on page 150 and SecondaryInformation Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only)on page 175.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 135.

E. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 147.

F. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 274.

G. Horn. See Horn on page 136.H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 186.I. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 127.J. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

on page 149.K. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette

Lighter on page 149.L. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 150.M. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 127.

133

United States Sedan Shown, Canada Sedan similar

134

The main components of your instrument panelare the following:A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 154.B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument

Panel Cluster on page 158.C. Digital Clock. See Clock on page 150.D. Hood Release. See Hood Release on

page 274.E. Horn. See Horn on page 136.F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 186.G. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 150.H. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

on page 149.I. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 127.J. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette

Lighter on page 149.K. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 135.L. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 127.

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel on thesedan. It is located tothe right of the climatecontrol system on thehatchback.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key is not inthe ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

135

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelYour vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you toadjust the steering wheel before you drive. You canraise it to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The tilt wheel lever islocated underneaththe steering columnslightly to the left.

To tilt the steering wheel, hold the wheel andpush the lever down. Then, move the wheel to acomfortable position and pull the lever up to lockthe wheel in place.

136

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See

Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 137.• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 138.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 138.• P Exterior Light Control. See Exterior Lamps

on page 145.• - Fog Lamps, if equipped. See Fog Lamps on

page 147.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lowerthe lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you complete your lane change.The lever will return by itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out andother drivers will not see your turn signal.

Uplevel shown, Base similar

137

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbsand then check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 356.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunctionlever away from you.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on if theignition is turned to ON.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield Wipers

Sedan shown, Hatchback similar

138

Use this lever located on the right side of thesteering wheel to operate the windshield wipers.The ignition must be turned to ON to operatethe windshield wipers.

HI (High Speed): Move the lever to this positionfor wiping at high speed.

LO (Low Speed): Move the lever to this positionfor steady wiping at low speed.

INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to this positionto choose a delayed wiping cycle.

OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn off thewindshield wipers.

Misting FunctionMove the lever toward INT for a single wipingcycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipers start;then let go. The windshield wipers will stop afterone wipe. If you want more wipes, hold theband toward INT longer.

Remember that damaged wiper blades mayprevent you from seeing well enough to drivesafely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice andsnow from the wiper blades before using them.

If they are frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them. If your blades do becomedamaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

139

Windshield WasherTo wash your windshield, pull the windshieldwasher/wiper lever toward you with the ignitionturned to ON.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you release the lever, the washers will stop,but the wipers will continue to wipe for severalcycles and will either stop or will resume atthe speed you were using before.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer(Hatchback)

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

Your vehicle may have a rear window washer/wiper. Operate the rear window washer/wipersystem by pushing the windshield washer/wiperlever away from you. The wiper operatesintermittently when the lever is in the first position.Washer fluid sprays onto the rear window and thewiper operates continuously when the lever ispushed to the second position.

140

The rear window washer uses the same fluidbottle as the windshield washer. However, therear window washer will run out of fluid before thewindshield washer. If you can wash your windshieldbut not your rear window, check the fluid level.

Cruise ControlIf your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintaina speed of about 24 mph (39 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This can reallyhelp on long trips. Cruise control does not work atspeeds below 24 mph (39 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, or the clutch pedal ifyou have a manual transaxle, the cruise controlturns off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

141

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

The cruise control padis located on the rightside of the steeringwheel.

1. Press the ON-OFF button (A) to turn cruisecontrol on.

2. Accelerate to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET button and release it. Thecruise control light will come on in theinstrument panel cluster to show that thecruise control is on.

4. Take your foot off the accelerate pedal.

142

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake pedal, orthe clutch pedal if you have a manual transaxle.This, of course, shuts off the cruise control.But you do not need to reset it. Once you aregoing about 24 mph (39 km/h) or more, you canbriefly press the RESUME button.

You will go right back up to your chosen speedand stay there.

If you hold in the RESUME button longer, thevehicle will keep going faster until you release thebutton or apply the brake pedal. So unless youwant to go faster, do not hold in the RESUMEbutton.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higherspeed. Press the SET button, then releasethe button and the accelerator pedal. You willnow cruise at the higher speed.

• Press the RESUME button. Hold it there untilyou get up to the speed you want, and thenrelease the button. To increase your speed invery small amounts, briefly press the RESUMEbutton and then release it. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)faster.

The accelerate feature will only work after you turnon the cruise control by pressing the SET button.

143

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press the SET button until you reach thelower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the SET button. Each time you dothis, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steep hills, you mayhave to step on the accelerator pedal to maintainyour speed. When going downhill, you may have tobrake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speeddown. Of course, applying the brake pedal takesyou out of cruise control. Many drivers find this tobe too much trouble and do not use cruise controlon steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or pressthe clutch pedal, if you have a manualtransaxle.

• Press the ON OFF button on the cruisecontrol pad.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, your cruise control set speed memory iserased.

144

Exterior Lamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp band has three positions:

3 (Headlamps): Turn the band to this positionto turn on the headlamps, together with thefollowing:

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamp

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Parking Lamps

The headlamps will automatically turn off when theignition key is turned to lock or accessory.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the band to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps, together withthe taillamps, license plate lamp, and instrumentpanel lights.

OFF: Turn the band to this position to turnall lamps off, except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignitionturned to LOCK or ACC while leaving the lampson, you will hear a warning chime.

Uplevel shown, Base similar

145

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and before sunset. Fullyfunctional daytime running lamps are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make your low-beamheadlamps come on when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in theparking lamp position.

• The parking brake is released.

An indicator light on instrument panel cluster willcome on when the DRL system is on.

When the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, parking lamps and instrumentpanel lights will not be illuminated unless you haveturned the exterior lamps control to the parkinglamp or headlamp position.

The DRL system will turn off when one of thefollowing conditions are met:

• The ignition is off.

• The parking brake is on.

• The high-beam headlamps are on.

• The low-beam headlamps are on.

• The flash-to-pass feature is used.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

146

Fog LampsIf your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for bettervisibility in foggy or misty conditions. The bandlocated on the middle of the turn signal/multifunction lever controls the fog lamps.

While using the fog lamps, the ignition must beturned to ON and the low-beam headlampsor parking lamps must be on.

Turn the band to ON to turn the fog lamps on.An indicator light will come on in the secondaryinformation center on the hatchback or in theinstrument panel cluster on the sedan, when the foglamps are on. See Fog Lamp Light on page 186.

Turn the band to OFF to turn the fog lamps off. Thefog lamps will also turn off when the high-beamheadlamps are turned on. When the high-beamheadlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will turn onagain.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the brightness of theinstrument panel lights.

The thumbwheel for this feature is located on theinstrument panel to the left of the steering column.Turn the thumbwheel to brighten or dim the lights.

Hatchback Sedan

147

Dome LampYour vehicle will have one of the following domelamp switches.

The switches have three positions.

ON: The light comes on and stays on.

O (Door): The light comes on when a door isopened. The light turns off when all the doors areclosed.

OFF: The light remains off even when a door isopened.

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect your vehicle’sbattery against drainage from the taillamps, licenseplate lamp, instrument panel lights and parkinglamps. When the ignition is turned off, the powerto these features will automatically turn offafter 5 seconds once the driver’s door is closed.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)With the accessory power outlet, you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

The accessory power outlet is located next to theparking brake on the center console.

To use the outlet, remove the protective cap.When not in use, always cover the outlet with theprotective cap. The accessory power outlet isoperational when the ignition is turned to ACCor ON.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum amperage rating.

Without Sunroof

With Sunroof

148

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterThe ashtray is located at the lower part of thecenter instrument panel. To remove the frontashtray for cleaning, open the ashtray fully,press in the retaining tab and pull the bin out.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignite themand possibly damage your vehicle. Never putflammable items in the ashtray.

The cigarette lighter is located to the right of thefront ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC orON, push the cigarette lighter in all the way andlet go. When it is ready, it will pop back outby itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.

149

ClockIf you have a sedan there is a digital clock locatedin the center of the instrument panel, above thecenter air outlets. When the ignition is turnedto ACC or ON, the time is displayed in the digitalclock. There are three adjusting buttons forthe digital clock:

H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the Hbutton once. To go forward more than one hour,press and hold the button until the correct hour isreached.

M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the Mbutton once. To go forward more than one minute,press and hold the button until the correct minute isreached.

S (Set): To reset the time to the nearest hour,press the S button.

For example, if the set button is pressed while thetime is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to8:00. If this button is pressed while the time isbetween 8:30 and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.

After disconnecting the battery or replacing thefuse, reset the clock.

If you have a hatchback there is a clock locatedin the Secondary Information Center (SIC), seeSecondary Information Center (SIC) (HatchbackOnly) on page 175.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

Uplevel shown, Base similar, Hatchback only

150

Temperature Control: Turn the left knobclockwise or counterclockwise to manuallyincrease or decrease the temperature insideyour vehicle. Turn the knob to the blue area forcool air and to the red area for warm air.

9 (Fan): Turn the middle knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. In any setting other than off, the fan will runcontinuously with the ignition on. The fan must beon in order for the air conditioning compressorto run.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing from the right knob:

Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half ofthe air to the instrument panel outlets, andthen directs the remaining air to the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets. Some of the air will also be directed tothe rear outlets. Be sure to keep the area under thefront seats clear to allow the flow of air to the rearcompartment.

The right knob can also be used to select thedefog and defrost modes. Information on defoggingand defrosting can be found later in this section.

? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside airfrom coming into the vehicle. It can be used toprevent outside air and odors from entering yourvehicle or to help heat or cool the air insideyour vehicle more quickly.

Uplevel shown, Base similar, Sedan only

151

If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevelmodel), press the button to turn the recirculationmode on. When the button is pressed, an indicatorlight in the button will come on. Press the buttonagain to return to outside air mode.

If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move thelever to choose the recirculation mode.

Using the recirculation mode for extended periodsmay cause your windows to fog. If this happens,select the defrost mode.

: (Outside Air): This mode brings outside airinto the vehicle.

If your vehicle has a recirculation button (uplevelmodel), press the button until the recirculationmode is turned off. Your vehicle will then returnto outside air mode.

If your vehicle has a lever (base model), move thelever to choose the outside air mode.

A/C (Air Conditioning): If your vehiclehas air conditioning, follow these steps touse the system. Start the engine and setthe fan control knob to the desired speed.

The air conditioning compressor does not operatewhen the fan control knob is in the off position.Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioningcompressor on and off. When the A/C button ispressed, an indicator light in the button will come onto let you know that air conditioning is activated.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Press the A/C button.

4. Select the recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicle tobecome too dry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in your vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

152

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath your vehiclewhile idling or after turning off the engine. This isnormal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity or moisture condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There are twomodes to clear fog or frost from your windshield.Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog ormoisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrostmode to remove fog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly.

For best results, clear all snow and ice from thewindshield before defrosting.

Select one of these available modes from theright knob.

0 (Defog): This mode directs most of the airto the windshield and the floor outlets. A smallamount of air is also directed to the outboard outletsfor the side windows and to the instrument panelside outlets. When you select this mode, the systemruns the air-conditioning compressor. To defog thewindows faster, turn the temperature control knobclockwise to the warmest setting.

1 (Defrost): This mode directs the air to thewindshield and the outboard outlets for the sidewindows. A small amount of air is also directed tothe instrument panel side outlets. When you selectthis mode, the system runs the air-conditioningcompressor. To defrost the windows faster, turnthe temperature control knob clockwise to thewarmest setting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

153

Rear Window and Outside MirrorDefoggerYour vehicle may have a rear window and outsidemirror defogger. This feature will only work whenthe ignition is turned to ON.

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window. Beforeusing this feature, clear as much snow from the rearwindow as possible.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window and outside mirror defoggeron or off. An indicator light in the button will comeon to let you know that the feature is activated.

If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, therear window defogger will remain on until the buttonis pressed again or the engine is turned off.

If your vehicle has air conditioning, the rear windowdefogger will turn off about 10 minutes after thebutton is pressed. The defogger can also be turnedoff by pressing the button again or by turning theengine off.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentTo open an outlet, press on its cover. Turn thecover to change the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of yourvehicle more effectively.

154

Passenger Compartment Air FilterYour vehicle may have a passenger compartmentair filter. It is located behind the glove box and canbe accessed after removing the glove box from itshousing.

The filter traps most of the pollen from air enteringthe module. Like your engine’s air cleaner/filter,it may need to be changed periodically.

To change the passenger compartment air filter,use the following steps:

1. Open the glove box halfway down.

2. Grip the glove box by both the upper andlower sides and pull it out of its housing.

155

3. For hatchback models remove the fourscrews on the knee bolster and removethe knee bolster.

4. Then reverse the steps to install the new airfilter and replace the glove box.View the air flow arrows on the filter beforeinstalling to ensure you install the filtercorrectly.

156

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to your warning lights and gages couldalso save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As youwill see in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. If youare familiar with this section, you should not bealarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stayson as you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the sectionthat tells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous. So please get to know yourwarning lights and gages. They are a big help.

157

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will needto drive safely and economically.Your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained onthe following pages.

United States Hatchback shown, Canada Hatchback similar

158

United States Automatic Transaxle Sedan shown, Canada Manual Transaxle Sedan similar

159

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven in either miles, used in the UnitedStates, or kilometers, used in Canada.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can record the number of miles,used in the United States, or kilometers, used inCanada, traveled for up to two trips.

You can cycle between the odometer and tripodometers A and B by pressing the reset buttonlocated in the lower right area of the speedometer.By pressing the reset button, you can tell howmany miles or kilometers have been recordedon either Trip A or Trip B since you last set the tripodometer back to zero.

To reset each trip odometer to zero, press andhold the reset button. The reset button resets onlythe trip odometer that is being displayed. Eachtrip odometer must be reset individually.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays your engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine above6,500 rpm, your vehicle could be damaged, andthe damages would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not operate the engine with thetachometer above 6,500 rpm.

Hatchback Sedan

160

Safety Belt Reminder Light

The safety belt light willcome on and stay onuntil the driver’ssafety belt is buckled.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light willnot come on.

Safety Belt Reminder ToneIf your vehicle has this feature, a tone will soundfor several seconds when the ignition is turnedto ON to remind people to fasten their safety belts.The tone will not sound if the driver’s safety beltis already buckled.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensor, the airbag modules, the wiring andthe crash sensing and diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 68.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

161

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has a passenger airbag statusindicator. If you have a sedan, the airbag off symbolwill be visible near the clock, located in the center ofthe instrument panel during the system check. Or, ifyou have a hatchback, the airbag off symbol will belocated in the secondary information center. SeeSecondary Information Center (SIC) (HatchbackOnly) on page 175 for location information.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will light forseveral seconds as a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, if the off symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbagand side impact airbag (if equipped).

United States — Sedan Canada — Sedan

162

See Passenger Sensing System on page 77 formore on this, including important safety information.If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag(if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the off symbol in the passenger airbagstatus indicator does not come on whenyou have a rear-facing child restraintinstalled in the right front passenger’sseat, it means that the passenger sensingsystem has not turned off the passenger’sfrontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped).A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag or airbags inflate.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag or airbags.



Do not use a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger’s seat unless theairbag or airbags have been turned off.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag and side airbag (if equipped). SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 176 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

163

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, and the engineis not running, as acheck to show you it isworking.

Then it should go out when the engine is started.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the electricalcharging system. Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For good braking,though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspected rightaway.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

Hatchback andCanada Sedan

U.S. Sedan Only

164

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 257.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle has anAnti-Lock Brake System(ABS), this light willcome on when theignition is turned toON and may stay onfor several seconds.That is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK.If the light comes on, stop as soon as possibleand turn the ignition off. Then start the engineagain to reset the system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. See your dealer.

165

If the regular brake system warning light is not on,you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lockbrakes. If the regular brake system warning light isalso on, you do not have anti-lock brakes and thereis a problem with your regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 164.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition to ON. This is normal. If thelight does not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Hold Mode Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, this light willcome on when thehold mode is active.

If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehiclechecked. See “Hold Mode” under AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 111 for additionalinformation on this feature.

166

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Your vehicle has an engine coolant temperaturegage. With the ignition turned to ON, this gageshows the engine coolant temperature.

If the gage pointer moves into the red area, yourengine is too hot. It means that your enginecoolant has overheated.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 290.United States Hatchback Canada Hatchback

United States Sedan Canada Sedan

167

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The Check Engine light comes onto indicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated by thesystem before any problem is apparent. This mayprevent more serious damage to your vehicle. Thissystem is also designed to assist your servicetechnician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or replacement tires that do notmatch your vehicle’s original tires can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and may causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 264.

When the ignition is on, this light should come onand should go out after a few seconds as a check toshow you it is working. If the light does not comeon, have it repaired.

168

This light will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park yourvehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 secondsand restart the engine. If the light remains onsteady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps,and see your dealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emissionsystem malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 269.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

169

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.Have you recently changed brands of fuel?If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 266. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice thisas stalling after start-up, stalling when youput the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmedup.) This will be detected by the system and causethe light to turn on.If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.If none of the above steps have made the light turnoff, your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealerhas the proper test equipment and diagnostic toolsto fix any mechanical or electrical problems thatmay have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theCheck Engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection. Thiscan happen if you have recently replaced yourbattery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving. If youhave done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle forinspection.

170

Oil Pressure Light

If your vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight will stay on afteryou start your engine,or come on whenyou are driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Haveit fixed immediately by your dealer.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test to showyou it is working. The light will go out when youturn the ignition on. If it does not come on withthe ignition on, you may have a problem withthe fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may comeon for a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

171

Fog Lamp Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the fog lampslight will come on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 147 formore information.

Cruise Control Light

If your vehicle hascruise control, this lightcomes on wheneveryou set your cruisecontrol.

The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 141for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever the high-beamheadlamps are on.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 138 for additional information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light

This light will comeon when the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL)are on.

A flashing DRL light indicates a possible burnedout headlamp, or that the vehicle may need serviceto repair a defective DRL relay. See your dealer.

172

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 146for more information.

Door Ajar Light

The door ajar light willcome on whenevera door is opened,regardless of theignition position.

If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s dooris open, you will also hear a warning chime.

Fuel Gage

United States Hatchback Canada Hatchback

United States Sedan Canada Sedan

173

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel youhave left when the ignition is turned to ON.

When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warninglight will come on. You still have a little fuel left, butyou should get more soon. See Low Fuel WarningLight on page 174 for more information.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less than halfthe tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The indicator moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turn offthe ignition.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes onwhen the vehicle is lowon fuel.

The low fuel warning light comes on when there isapproximately 1.7 gallons (6.0 liters) of fuelremaining in the tank.

To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank.See Filling the Tank on page 269.

174

Secondary Information Center (SIC)Secondary Information Center (SIC) (Hatchback Only)

The secondary information center (SIC) displays some of the warning lights and indicators. The SIC islocated in the center of the instrument panel, above the center air outlets. The digital clock is also located inthe center of the SIC. See Clock (Hatchback Only) on page 176 and Instrument Panel Overview onpage 132 for more information.

United States shown, Canada similar

175

Clock (Hatchback Only)Your vehicle has a digital clock. The clock is locatedin the secondary instrument cluster on the center ofthe instrument panel, above the center air outlets.When the ignition is turned to ACC or ON, the timeis displayed in the digital clock. There are twoadjusting buttons for the digital clock:

H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the Hbutton once. To go forward more than one hour,press and hold the button until the correct hour isreached.

M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the Mbutton once. To go forward more than one minute,press and hold the button until the correct minute isreached.

After disconnecting the battery or replacing thefuse, reset the clock.

Safety Belt Reminder Light

The safety belt light willcome on and stay onuntil the driver’s safetybelt is buckled.

This light will come on briefly when you turn onthe ignition as a check to show you it is working.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the secondaryinformation center (SIC), which shows the airbagsymbol. The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor, the airbag modules, the wiringand the crash sensing and diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 68.

176

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on or flashes when youare driving, your airbag system may not workproperly. Have your vehicle serviced right awayby your dealer.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition to ON. If thelight does not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

177

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator(Hatchback)Your vehicle has passenger airbag status indicator.

If you have a hatchback, the airbag off symbol isvisible in the Secondary Information Center (SIC)during the system check.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightfor several seconds as a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, if the off symbol is lit onthe passenger airbag status indicator, it meansthat the passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped). See PassengerSensing System on page 77 for more on this,including important safety information.

If the off symbol is not lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag(if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).

United States —Hatchback

Canada —Hatchback

178

{CAUTION:

If the off symbol in the passenger airbagstatus indicator does not come on whenyou have a rear-facing child restraintinstalled in the right front passenger’sseat, it means that the passenger sensingsystem has not turned off the passenger’sfrontal airbag and side airbag (if equipped).A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag or airbags inflate.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag or airbags. Do not use arear-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat unless the airbag orairbags have been turned off.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag and side airbag (if equipped). SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 176 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

179

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, and the engineis not running, as acheck to show you itis working.

Then it should go out when the engine is started.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, youmay have a problem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by your dealer. Drivingwhile this light is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle has anAnti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), this lightwill come on when theignition is turned to ONand may stay on forseveral seconds.That is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. If thelight comes on, stop as soon as possible and turnthe ignition off. Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on, or comes onagain while you are driving, your vehicle needsservice. See your dealer. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is also on, you do nothave anti-lock brakes and there is a problem withyour regular brakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 164.

180

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition to ON. This is normal. If thelight does not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Hold Mode Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, this light willcome on when the holdmode is active.

If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehiclechecked. See “Hold Mode” under AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 111 for additionalinformation on this feature.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition, andemission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The Check Engine light comes onto indicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated bythe system before any problem is apparent.

181

This may prevent more serious damage to yourvehicle. This system is also designed to assist yourservice technician in correctly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or replacement tires that do notmatch your vehicle’s original tires can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and may causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 264.

When the ignition is on, this light should comeon and should go out after a few secondsas a check to show you it is working. If thelight does not come on, have it repaired.

This light will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

182

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park yourvehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 secondsand restart the engine. If the light remains onsteady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps,and see your dealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emissionsystem malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 269.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

183

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 266. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you put thevehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmedup.) This will be detected by the system and causethe light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turnoff, your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealerhas the proper test equipment and diagnostic toolsto fix any mechanical or electrical problems thatmay have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theCheck Engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection. Thiscan happen if you have recently replaced yourbattery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving. If youhave done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle forinspection.

184

Oil Pressure Light

If your vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight will stay on afteryou start your engine,or come on whenyou are driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your dealer.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test to showyou it is working. The light will go out when youturn the ignition on. If it does not come on withthe ignition on, you may have a problem withthe fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may come onfor a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

185

Fog Lamp Light

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the fog lampslight will come on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 147 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

The door ajar light willcome on whenever adoor is opened,regardless of theignition position.

If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s dooris open, you will also hear a warning chime.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for a saferdriving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 220. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’s audiosystem, you can use it with less effort, as well astake advantage of its features. While your vehicle isparked, set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoritestations using the presets and steering wheelcontrols if the vehicle has them.

186

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

187

AM-FM Radio (Single Display,Base Level)

Playing the Radio

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon or off.

u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume. VOL will appear onthe display.

Finding a Station

AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.

p (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

tu (Scan): Press this knob until SCAN flasheson the display, then press either the up or the downarrow buttons to determine the direction for theradio to scan the stations. The radio will go to astation, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext station. Press either arrow button again to stopscanning.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

188

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for longer than two seconds.Ch will appear on the display when the stationhas been set. Whenever that numberedpushbutton is pressed, the station that wasset will return.

5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

f (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BASappears on the display. Then turn the volume knobto increase or to decrease the bass. The displaywill show the bass level.

Press this button until TRE appears on thedisplay. Then turn the volume knob to increaseor to decrease the treble. The display will show thetreble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decreasethe treble.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

f (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisbutton until BAL appears on the display. Then turnthe volume knob to increase or to decrease thebalance between the right and the left speakers.The display will show the balance level.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this button until FAD appears onthe display. Then turn the volume knob to increaseor to decrease the fade between the front and therear speakers. The display will show the fade level.

189

AM-FM Radio (Double Display,Base Level)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on or off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Press and hold this knob for more thantwo seconds to silence the system. Press andrelease this knob again to turn the sound back on.

The previous volume setting is maintainedwhenever the radio is turned on. The volumecan be adjusted by using the volume knob.

Finding a Station

AM/AUX: Press this button to play an AM stationwhile a portable audio device is playing. Pressthis button again and the system will begin playingaudio from the connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is not connected,“no input device found” will be displayed.

FM: Press this button to switch between FM1 orFM2. The display will show the selection.

¦¥ SEEK: Press the up or down SEEK arrow togo to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

190

() TUNE: Press the up or down TUNE arrowto go to the next or to the previous radio station.

SCAN: Push and release this button to scan radiostations. The radio will go to a station, play for afew seconds, then go on to the next station.Push this button again to stop scanning.

The radio will only scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six FM-A andsix AM1, six AM2, six AM-A), can be programmedon the six numbered pushbuttons, by performingthe following steps:


2. Press AM/AUX to select AM1, AM2, or AM-A.Press FM to select FM1, FM2 or FM-A.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for longer than two seconds.The channel number (CH#1 through CH#6)will flash on the display when the stationhas been set. Whenever that numbered presetbutton is pressed, the station that was setwill return.

5. Repeat the first four steps for each presetbutton.

AST (Automatic Store): Six FM1 preset stationswith the strongest reception in the region can beautomatically stored. Press the AST button forlonger than one second. The display will showAUTO SCANNING and then SCANNING will flashon display. Once the stations are stored, the radiowill switch to FM1 and the first preset station willbegin to play. FM-A will appear on the display whenlistening to the automatic stored stations. Press theAM or FM button to cancel automatic store.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is BASS,MID, TRE, FAD, BAL, EQ OFF, and VOL.

191

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Midrange/Treble): Press thisbutton until BAS appears on the display. Turn thepower/volume knob to increase or to decrease thebass. The display will show the bass level. Whenfinished making the selection, press this button toselect the bass level.

Press this button until MID appears on the display.Turn the power/volume knob to increase or todecrease the midrange. The display will showthe midrange level. When finished making theselection, press this button to select the midrangelevel.

Press this button until TRE appears on the display.Turn the power/volume knob to increase or todecrease the treble. The display will show the treblelevel. When finished making the selection, pressthis button to select the treble level. If a station isweak or there is static, decrease the treble.


SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisbutton until BAL appears on the display. Turn thepower/volume knob to increase or to decrease. Thedisplay will show the balance level. When finishedmaking the selection, press this button to select thebalance level.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this button until FAD appearson the display. Turn the power/volume knob toincrease or to decrease the fade between the frontand the rear speakers. The display will show thefade level. When finished making the selection,press this button to select the fade level.

192

Setting the EQ (Equalization)

SOUND (Equalization): Press this buttonuntil EQ OFF appears on the display to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forclassic, dance, rock, jazz, pop, voice, and techno.Turn the power/volume knob until the desiredequalization setting appears on the display. Whenfinished making the selection, press the SOUNDbutton to select the equalization setting.

To cancel an equalization setting, press theSOUND button until EQ OFF appears on thedisplay, turn the power/volume knob until OFFappears on the display, then press the SOUNDbutton again to select the equalization setting.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is EQ OFF,CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE,TECHNO, and EQ OFF.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

AUX IN (Auxiliary Input): Your radio system hasan auxiliary input jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. This is not an audio output; donot plug the headphone set into the front auxiliaryinput jack. You can however, connect an externalaudio device such as an iPod, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD changer, or XM™ receiver, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another source foraudio listening.

The auxiliary input jack will also accept cell phoneconnectors. Plug the cell phone connector into theauxiliary input jack to hear the other side of a cellphone’s conversation through the vehicle soundsystem.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in park (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 220 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

193

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected, turn the portableaudio player on. Press and hold the radio AM/AUXbutton for more than two seconds or until audiofrom the device begins to play over the carspeakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need todo additional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume is not loud or soft enough.

AM/AUX: Press this button to listen to theradio while a portable audio device is playing.The portable audio device will continue playing,so you may want to stop it or turn it off.

Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press and release this knobto turn the system on or off.

Turn the power/volume knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume.

Press this button for longer than two seconds tomute the system.

194

Finding a Station

AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.The display shows the selection.

FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.The display shows the selection.

() TUNE: Press this button to select radiostations.

Press the up arrows to increase or the downarrows to decrease the radio frequencies.

¦¥ SEEK: Press this button to seek radiostations.

Press the up arrows to seek the next radio stationor the down arrows to seek the previous radiostation.

SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radiostations. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station.Press this button again to stop scanning.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

AST (Automatic Store)Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest receptionin the region can be automatically stored. Press theAST button for more than two seconds. The displayshows AUTO SCANNING and then SCANNINGflashes on the display. Once the stations are stored,the radio switches to FM1 and the first presetstation begins to play. FM-A appears on the displaywhile listening to the automatic stored stations.Press the AM or FM button to cancel automaticstore.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 24 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM1, andsix AM2), can be programmed on the six numberedbuttons, by performing the following steps:


2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1,FM2, AM1 or AM2.


195

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedbuttons for more than two seconds. Thepreset button number one through six flasheson the display when the station has been set.Whenever that numbered preset button ispressed, that preset station returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each presetbutton.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is BASS,TRE, BAL, FADE, EQ OFF, and VOL (Bass,Treble, Fade, Balance, Equalization Off,and Volume).

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button untilBAS (bass) appears on the display. Turn thevolume knob to increase or to decrease the bass.The display shows the bass level. After makingthe selection, press this button to set the basslevel selection.

Press this button until TRE (treble) appears on thedisplay. Turn the volume knob to increase or todecrease the treble. The display shows the treblelevel. After making the selection, press this buttonto set the treble level selection. If a station is weakor has static, decrease the treble.


SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisbutton until BAL (balance) appears on the display.Turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease.The display shows the balance level. After makingthe selection, press this button to set the balancelevel.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this button until FAD (fade)appears on the display. Turn the volume knob toincrease or to decrease the fade between the frontand the rear speakers. The display shows the fadelevel. After making the selection, press this buttonto set the fade level.

196

Setting the EqualizationThe order for displayed customized equalizationsettings are EQ OFF, CLASSIC, DANCE,ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE, TECHNO, EQ OFF.

SOUND (Equalization): Press this buttonuntil EQ OFF (equalization) appears on thedisplay to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop,voice and techno. Turn the volume knob untilthe desired equalization setting appears onthe display. After making the selection, press theSOUND button to set the equalization setting.

To cancel an equalization setting, press theSOUND button until EQ OFF appears on thedisplay, turn the volume knob until OFF appearson the display, then press the SOUND buttonagain to set the equalization setting.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. Insert a CD with the ignition off.

When a CD is inserted, CDP appears on thedisplay. As the CD is loading, Filecheck appears onthe display. As each new track starts to play, Trackand the track number appears on the display.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When a CD is in theplayer and the ignition is turned on, the radio mustbe turned on before the CD starts playback. Whenthe ignition and radio are turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

197

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled.There may be an increase in skipping, difficultyin finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 217 formore information.If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeat thecurrent track. RPT appears on the display.Press this button again to turn off repeat play.

3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM appears on the display. Press this buttonagain to turn off random play.

4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to thefirst few seconds of each track on each loaded CD.INTRO appears on the display. To stop scanningpress this button again. The current trackbegins to play.

() TUNE (Previous/Next Track): Press thedown arrows to go to the start of the current track orpress the up arrows to go to the next track. Thetrack number appears on the display. The playercontinues moving backward or forward through theCD with each press of the up or down arrows.

AM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

198

FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD whilelistening to the radio. CDP appears on the displaywhen the CD player has been selected. The CDsymbol appears on the display when a CD isloaded.

Press this button while a CD is playing to pause theCD. PAUSE flashes on the display. Press thisbutton again to start playing the CD.

EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. This isthe only way a CD can be ejected from the player.The CD can eject when the ignition or the radiois turned off.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R DiscIf you have a radio with a single CD (MP3), it iscapable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc. Formore information on how to play an MP3/WMACD-R disc, see Using an MP3 (Radio with CDPlayer) on page 208 or Using an MP3 (Radio withSix-Disc Player) on page 212 later in this section.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• The format of the CD may not be compatible.See Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) onpage 208 or Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-DiscPlayer) on page 212 later in this section.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

199

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate. Thisis not an audio output. Do not plug the headphoneset into the front auxiliary input jack. You canhowever, connect an external audio device such asan iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,or cassette tape player, etc. to the auxiliary inputjack for use as another source for audio listening.

The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phoneconnectors. Plug the cell phone connector into theauxiliary input jack to hear a person speakingon a cell phone during conversation through thevehicle sound system.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 220 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected, turn the portableaudio player on and press the radio CD/AUX buttonto hear audio from the device over the carspeakers.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button once toplay a CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button a second time for the system tobegin playing audio from the connected portableaudio player. Once in this mode, “Auxinput”appears on the display. If the auxiliary jack does notdetect the presence of an output jack, the auxiliarymode does not display.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. Additionaladjustments on a portable device may needto be made to get the desired volume.

200

Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3/WMA)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press and release this knobto turn the system on or off.

Turn the power/volume knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume.

Press and hold this knob for more thantwo seconds to silence the system. Press andrelease this knob again to turn the sound back on.

Finding a Station

AM: Press this button to switch to an AM station.The display shows the selection.

FM: Press this button to switch to an FM station.The display shows the selection.

() TUNE: Press this button to select radiostations.

Press the up arrows to increase or the downarrows to decrease the radio frequencies.

¦¥ SEEK: Press this button to seek radiostations.

Press the up arrows to seek the next radio stationor the down arrows to seek the previous radiostation.

SCAN/AST: Press this button to scan radiostations. The radio goes to a station, plays fora few seconds, then goes to the next station.Press this button again to stop scanning.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

201

AST (Automatic Store)Six FM1 preset stations with the strongest receptionin the region can be automatically stored. Press theAST button for more than one second. The displayshows AUTO SCANNING and then SCANNINGflashes on the display. Once the stations are stored,the radio switches to FM1 and the first presetstation begins to play. FM-A appears on the displaywhile listening to the automatic stored stations.Press the AM or FM button to cancel automaticstore.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six FM-A,six AM1, six AM2, and six AM-A), can beprogrammed on the six numbered buttons,by performing the following steps:


2. Press the AM or FM button to select FM1,FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2, or AM-A.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for more than two seconds.

The channel number (CH#1 through CH#6)flashes on the display when the stationhas been set. Whenever that numbered presetbutton is pressed, that preset station returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 for each presetbutton.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is BASS,TRE, FAD, BAL, EQ OFF, and VOL (Bass, Treble,Fade, Balance, Equalization Off, and Volume).

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Midrange/Treble): Press thisbutton until BAS (bass) appears on the display.Turn the power/volume knob to increase or todecrease the bass. The display shows the basslevel. After making the selection, press this buttonto select the bass level.

Press this button until MID (midrange) appearson the display. Turn the power/volume knob toincrease or to decrease the midrange. Thedisplay shows the midrange level. After making theselection, press this button to select the midrangelevel.

202

Press this button until TRE (treble) appears on thedisplay. Turn the power/volume knob to increase orto decrease the treble. The display shows the treblelevel. After making the selection, press this buttonto select the treble level. If a station is weak or hasstatic, decrease the treble.


SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisbutton until BAL (balance) appears on the display.Turn the power/volume knob to increase or todecrease the balance. The display shows thebalance level. After making the selection, pressthis button to select the balance level.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this button until FAD (fade)appears on the display. Turn the power/volumeknob to increase or to decrease the fade betweenthe front and the rear speakers. The display showsthe fade level. After making the selection, press thisbutton to select the fade level.

Setting the EQ (Equalization)

SOUND (Equalization): Press this button untilEQ OFF (equalization) appears on the display toselect customized equalization settings designedfor classic, dance, rock, jazz, pop, voice, andtechno. Turn the power/volume knob untilthe desired equalization setting appears on thedisplay. After making the selection, press theSOUND button to select the equalization setting.

To cancel an equalization setting, press theSOUND button until EQ OFF appears on thedisplay. Turn the power/volume knob untilOFF appears on the display, then press theSOUND button again to select the equalizationsetting.

Order of Sound FunctionThe order for displayed sound function is EQ OFF,CLASSIC, DANCE, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, VOICE,TECHNO, and EQ OFF.

203

Playing a CD(s)

LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

1. Press and release the load button. A messageto select a slot number from 1 through 6appears on display.

2. Press the desired slot number. Wait for themessage to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep will sound and amessage to load multiple discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the LOAD button again to cancelloading more CDs.

As each CD is inserted, CDP appears on thedisplay. As each CD is loading, Filecheck appearson the display.

Once playback begins, the track and track numberappears on the display.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When a CD is in theplayer and the ignition is turned on, the radio mustbe turned on before the current CD starts playback.When the ignition and radio are turned on, the CDstarts playing where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled.There may be an increase in skipping, difficultyin finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 217 formore information.

204

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot freeof foreign materials, liquids, and debris.


2 RPT (Repeat): Press this button to repeatthe current track. RPT appears on the display.Press this button again to turn off repeat play.

3 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM appears on the display.

To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press this buttonuntil a message that all discs are randomized isdisplayed. Press the same button again to turn offrandom play.

4 INT (Scan): Press this button to listen to the firstfew seconds of each track on each loaded CD.INTRO appears on the display. To stop scanningpress this button again. The current track beginsto play.

5 DSC − (Previous CDC): Press this button to goback to the start of the previous CDC.

6 DSC + (Next CDC): Press this button to goforward to the start of the next CDC.


AM: Press this button to listen to the radio whilea CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

205

FM: Press this button to listen to the radio while aCD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

CD/AUX: Press this button to play a CD whilelistening to the radio. CDP appears on the displaywhen the CD player has been selected. TheCD symbol appears on the display when a CD isloaded.

Press this button while a CD is playing to pausethe CD. PAUSE flashes on the display. Pressthis button again to start playing the CD.

EJECT: Press this button to eject the CD. Pressand hold this button to eject all CDs. This isthe only way a CD can be ejected from the player.The CD can eject when the ignition or the radiois turned off.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R DiscIf you have a radio with a six-disc CD player,it is capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc.For more information on how to play anMP3/WMA disc, see Using an MP3 (Radio withCD Player) on page 208 or Using an MP3 (Radiowith Six-Disc Player) on page 212 later in thissection.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• The format of the CD may not be compatible.See Using an MP3 (Radio with CD Player) onpage 208 or Using an MP3 (Radio with Six-DiscPlayer) on page 212 later in this section.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

206

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

AUX IN (Auxiliary Input): Your radio system hasan auxiliary input jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. This is not an audio output. Donot plug the headphone set into the front auxiliaryinput jack. You can however, connect an externalaudio device such as an iPod, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD changer, or XM™ receiver, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another source foraudio listening.

The auxiliary input jack also accepts cell phoneconnectors. Plug the cell phone connector into theauxiliary input jack to hear a person speck on a cellphone during a conversation through the vehiclesound system.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 220 for more informationon driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected, turn the portableaudio player on and press the radio CD/AUX buttonto hear audio from the device over the carspeakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decreasethe volume of the portable player. Additionaladjustments on a portable device may needto be made to get the desired volume.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button once toplay a CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button a second time for the system tobegin playing audio from the connected portableaudio player. Once in this mode, “Auxinput”appears on the display. If the auxiliary jack does notdetect the presence of an output jack, the auxiliarymode does not display.

207

Using an MP3(Radio with CD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recordedon a CD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMAfiles on one disc.

• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3uor .wma extension, other file extensionsmay not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album. Eachfolder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning anMP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long filenames and folder names may use more discmemory space than necessary. To conserve spaceon the disc, minimize the length of the file and foldernames. You can also play an MP3/WMA CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The system cansupport up to eight folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in order tokeep down the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback. If a CDcontains more than the maximum of 50 folders, fivesessions, and 999 files, the player lets you accessand navigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum is ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directoryis displayed as ROOT. All files contained directlyunder the root directory are accessed prior to anyother directory.

208

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen a CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The next andprevious folder function does not function on a CDthat was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When a CD contains only compressed audio files,but no folders, all files are located under the rootfolder. When the radio displays the name of thefolder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Playback begins from the first track under theroot directory.

• When all tracks from the root directory haveplayed, playback continues from files,according to their numerical listing.

• After playing the last track from the last folder,the player begins playing again at the firsttrack of the first folder or root directory.

File System and NamingThe song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If thesong name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio displays the file name without theextension (such as MP3/WMA) instead.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. Parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension of the filename doesnot display.

209

Playing an MP3/WMAWith the ignition on, insert a CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player pulls it in, Loading,then Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMA appears onthe display. The CD should begin playing. Youcannot insert a CD with the ACC (accessory) off.

As each new track starts to play, the track number,and the song name appears on the display.



If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled.

There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 217 formore information.



Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.


210

All of the CD functions work the same whileplaying an MP3/WMA, except for those listed here.See “Playing a CD” earlier for more information.

SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press theSOUND button for longer than two seconds. Thesong title or other available information of a songscrolls on/off. The offset is scroll on. The scrollmode can be changed only when the SOUNDbutton is pressed for longer than two seconds.

DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat thetracks in the current directory. DIR appears on thedisplay.

Press this button again to repeat the tracks in allof the directories. ALL appears on the display.

Press this button again to turn off repeat play.

¦¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (in MP3/WMA Mode): Press the up or down arrows tochange the folder. If CD-R does not have anyfolder, “ROOT” flashes on the display for ashort time.


INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press thisbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current MP3/WMA song. A choice ofadditional information such as: Song Title,Album Title, and Artist. Bit rate may alsoappear on display.

When information is not available, No Info(information) appears on the display.

Press this button for longer than two seconds tochange display mode.

211

Using an MP3 (Radio withSix-Disc Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recordedon a CD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMAfiles on one disc.

• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3uor .wma extension, other file extensionsmay not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album. Eachfolder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning anMP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long filenames and folder names may use more discmemory space than necessary. To conserve spaceon the disc, minimize the length of the file and foldernames. You can also play an MP3/WMA CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The system cansupport up to eight folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in order tokeep down the difficulty and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback. If a CDcontains more than the maximum of 50 folders, fivesessions, and 999 files, the player lets you accessand navigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum is ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directoryis displayed as ROOT. All files contained directlyunder the root directory are accessed prior to anyother directory.

212

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen a CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The next andprevious folder function does not function on a CDthat was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When a CD contains only compressed audio files,but no folders, all files are located under theroot folder. When the radio displays the nameof the folder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks is played in the following order:

• Playback begins from the first track under theroot directory.

• When all tracks from the root directory haveplayed, playback continues from files,according to their numerical listing.

• After playing the last track from the last folder,the player begins playing again at the firsttrack of the first folder or root directory.

File System and NamingThe song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If thesong name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio displays the file name without theextension (such as MP3/WMA) instead.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. Parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension of the filename doesnot display.

213

Playing an MP3/WMAWith the ignition on, insert a CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player pulls it in, Loading,then Filecheck, and then MP3 or WMA appears onthe display. The CD should begin playing. Youcannot insert a CD with the ACC (accessory) off.

As each new track starts to play, the track number,and the song name appears on the display.



If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled.

There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 217for more information.



Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot freeof foreign materials, liquids, and debris.


214

All of the CD functions work the same whileplaying an MP3/WMA, except for those listed here.See “Playing a CD” earlier for more information.

SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Pressthe SOUND button for longer than two seconds.The song title and other available informationof the song scrolls on/off. The offset is scroll on.The scroll mode can be changed only whenthe SOUND button is pressed for longer thantwo seconds.

1 DIR (Directory): Press this button to repeat thetracks in the current directory. DIR appears onthe display.

Press this button again to repeat the tracks in allof the directories. ALL appears on the display.

Press this button again to turn off repeat play.

¦¥ SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) (in MP3/WMA Mode): Press the up or down arrows tochange the folder. If CD-R does not have anyfolder, “ROOT” flashes on the display for ashort time.


INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press thisbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current MP3/WMA song. A choice ofadditional information such as: Song Title, AlbumTitle, and Artist. Bit rate may also appear ondisplay.

When information is not available, No Info(information) appears on the display.

Press this button for longer than two seconds tochange display mode.

215

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has this feature, some audiocontrols can be adjusted at the steering wheel.They include the following:

PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the audiosystem on or off.

Press and hold this button for less thantwo seconds to silence the system. Press andrelease this button again to turn the sound back on.

+ VOLUME − : Press the toggle bar located belowthe + VOLUME − to adjust the volume. Pressthe left side of the toggle bar, below the + (plus)sign to increase the volume. Press the right side ofthe toggle bar, below the − (minus) sign todecrease the volume.

SEEK: Press and release this button within0.5 seconds to go to the next preset station.

Press and hold this button for longer than0.5 seconds to go to the next radio station.The radio will only seek stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

When playing a CD, press and release this buttonwithin 0.5 seconds to go to the next track. Pressand hold this button for longer than 0.5 seconds tofast forward through the tracks.

MODE: Press and release this button to selectFM1, FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2, AM-A, or CD (MP3).Press and release this button multiple times tocycle through the audio playback options that areavailable on your vehicle.

Front View of theSteering Wheel Controls

Side View of theVolume Control

216

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if items suchas cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If thereis interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations willboost the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly or not at all. If thesurface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free clothor dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.Make sure the wiping process starts from the centerto the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating theinternal lens of the CD optics with lubricants.

217

Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback)The fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the antenna base located on the roofof the vehicle. If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

Backglass Antenna (Sedan)The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of the rear window isnot scratched and that the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it couldinterfere with radio reception. Also, for proper radioreception, the antenna connector at the top-centerof the rear window needs to be properly attached tothe post on the glass.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glasstinting with metallic film. The metallic filmin some tinting materials will interfere withor distort the incoming radio reception.

Any damage caused to your backglass antennadue to metallic tinting materials will not becovered by your warranty.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damage therear window antenna and/or the rear windowdefogger. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not clear the inside rear windowwith sharp objects.

Because this antenna is built into your rearwindow, there is a reduced risk of damage causedby car washes and vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached tothe glass, make sure that you do not damage thegrid lines for the AM-FM antenna. There is enoughspace between the lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna without interfering with radioreception.

218

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 220Defensive Driving ...................................... 220Drunken Driving ........................................ 221Control of a Vehicle .................................. 224Braking ...................................................... 224Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 225Braking in Emergencies ............................. 227Steering .................................................... 227Off-Road Recovery .................................... 230Passing ..................................................... 230Loss of Control .......................................... 232Driving at Night ......................................... 233Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 234City Driving ............................................... 237

Freeway Driving ........................................ 238Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 239Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 240Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 240Winter Driving ........................................... 242If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 247Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 248Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 248

Towing ........................................................ 257Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 257Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 257Towing a Trailer ........................................ 259

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

219

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 19.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

220

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends upon fourthings:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

221

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

222

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up. “I willbe careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

223

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 264.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 164.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

224

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some peopledrive in spurts — heavy acceleration followedby heavy braking — rather than keeping pacewith traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes maynot have time to cool between hard stops.The brakes will wear out much faster if you do alot of heavy braking. If you keep pace withthe traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while youare driving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harderto push down. If the engine stops, you will stillhave some power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist isused up, it may take longer to stop and the brakepedal will be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light willcome on briefly whenyou start your vehicle.

The warning light is on the instrument panelcluster for a sedan. See Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light on page 180. For hatchbackmodels, the warning light is on the SecondaryInformation Center (SIC). See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 180.

225

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster than anydriver could. The computer is programmed to makethe most of available tire and road conditions. Thiscan help you steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

226

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayfeel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice somenoise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeezethe brakes hard without locking the wheels. If youhear or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brakepedal. This will help you retain steering control. Ifyou do have ABS, it is different. See Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) on page 225.

In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

227

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both controlsystems — steering and braking — have to do theirwork where the tires meet the road. Unless youhave four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hardbraking can demand too much of those places. Youcan lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


228

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock yourwheels.

See Braking on page 224. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoided theobject.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

229

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

230

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass iscoming up, start to accelerate but stay inthe right lane and do not get too close. Timeyour move so you will be increasing speed asthe time comes to move into the other lane. Ifthe way is clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancel yourpass, you need only slow down and drop backagain and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

231

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skids arealways possible.The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.A cornering skid and an acceleration skidare best handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

232

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. Ifyou do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control.Push the brake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

233

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

234

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even ifyour windshield wiper blades are in good shape, aheavy rain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of theroad, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brakepedal lightly until your brakes worknormally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if the pressurein one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of wateris standing on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, andraindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could behydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

235

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 319.

236

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 238.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

237

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive atthe same speed most of the other drivers aredriving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks asmooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freewayas a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

238

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all across NorthAmerica. They will be ready and willing to helpif you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

239

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen.Then here are some tips:• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with

a comfortably cool interior.• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

240

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gearpossible.

241

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 319.

242

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.However, if there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.

243

But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too. Ifyou do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) on page 225. This system improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Whether you have ABS ornot, you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. Without ABS, ifyou feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on thebrakes a little. Push the brake pedal downsteadily to get the most traction you can.

244

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

245

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

246

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other parts of the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 248.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 335.

247

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)and a forward gear, or with a manual transaxle,between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) andREVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out. Ifyour vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 257.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight or maximum load amountand includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, andall nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on yourvehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information label andthe Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

248

Tire and Loading InformationLabel - United States

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The tire and loading information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The tire and loading information label alsoshows the tire size of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires on page 319 andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 326.

There is also important loading information onthe Certification label. See “Certification Label”later in this section.

Label Example

249

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs“ on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended totow a trailer.

250

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

251




1,000 lbs (453 kg)


Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passenger, andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel - Canada

A vehicle specific tire and loading informationlabel is attached to the driver’s side, centerpillar (B-pillar). This label shows the MaximumLoad amount, the number of occupant seatingpositions, the original equipment tires, andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Example 3

Label Example

252

For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 319 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 326.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. See “Certification Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the “Maximum Load” amount.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from the Maximum Loadamount.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the Maximum Load amountequals 1400 lbs (635 kg) and there will befive 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed nor intended to tow atrailer.

253


AVehicle CapacityWeight or MaximumLoad, for Example 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)


300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)


AVehicle CapacityWeight or MaximumLoad for Example 2 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)


Example 1 Example 2

254


AVehicle CapacityWeight or MaximumLoad for Example 3 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)


Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’smaximum load weight.

Certification Label

Example 3

Label Example - United States

255

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s doorlatch. This label tells you the gross weight capacityof your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Neverexceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Label Example - Canada

256

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 408.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle, such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

257

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 239.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do nottow your vehicle with all four wheels on theground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle mustbe towed, you should use a dolly. See “DollyTowing” that follows for more information.

258

Dolly Towing

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearwith the front wheels on the ground couldcause transaxle damage. Do not tow thevehicle from the rear with the front wheels onthe road.

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or amanual transaxle in NEUTRAL (N).

3. Set the parking brake and remove the key.

4. For an automatic transaxle, insert the key intothe shift-lock release slot. See Shifting Out ofPark (P) on page 119.

5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

6. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing a TrailerDo not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. Thevehicle is not designed or intended for such a use.Towing a trailer can adversely affect handling,durability and fuel economy.

259

✍ NOTES

260

Service ........................................................ 264Accessories and Modifications ................... 264California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 265Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 265Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 266Fuel ............................................................. 266

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 266Gasoline Specifications .............................. 266California Fuel ........................................... 267Additives ................................................... 267Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 268Filling the Tank ......................................... 269Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 272

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 273Hood Release ........................................... 274Engine Compartment Overview .................. 276Engine Oil ................................................. 277Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 281Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 283Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 285Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 286Engine Coolant .......................................... 287Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 290

Engine Overheating ................................... 290Cooling System ......................................... 292Power Steering Fluid ................................. 297Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 298Brakes ...................................................... 299Battery ...................................................... 303Jump Starting ............................................ 304

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 309Bulb Replacement ....................................... 309

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 309Headlamps (Hatchback) ............................. 310Headlamps (Sedan) ................................... 311Front Turn Signal and

Parking Lamps (Hatchback) ................... 312Front Turn Signal and

Parking Lamps (Sedan) .......................... 313Turn Signal Lamps (Side) .......................... 314Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) (Sedan) ................... 315Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .............. 316License Plate Lamp ................................... 317Replacement Bulbs ................................... 317

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

261

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 318Tires ............................................................ 319

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 320Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 323Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 326Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 327When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 329Buying New Tires ...................................... 330Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 331Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 332Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 333Wheel Replacement .................................. 333Tire Chains ............................................... 335If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 335Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 336Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 337Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ......................... 339Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 344Compact Spare Tire .................................. 344

Appearance Care ........................................ 345Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 345Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 346Leather ...................................................... 347Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces ........................... 348Care of Safety Belts .................................. 348Weatherstrips ............................................ 348Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 349Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 349Finish Care ............................................... 349Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 350Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 350Tires ......................................................... 351Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 351Finish Damage .......................................... 352Underbody Maintenance ............................ 352Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 352Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 353


262

Vehicle Identification .................................. 354Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 354Service Parts Identification Label ............... 354

Electrical System ........................................ 355Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 355Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 355Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 355

Power Windows and Other Power Options ... 356Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 356Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 357Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 361

Capacities and Specifications .................... 368Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 369

Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 370


263

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicleall GM. Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

264

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 421.

265

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 82.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Part E: MaintenanceRecord on page 398.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 267 for additional information.

266

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 168 for sedans or MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 181 for hatchbacks. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used, repairs maynot be covered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your GM dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

267

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

268

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

To open the fuel fillerdoor, pull up on therelease lever with thissymbol on it. It islocated on the floor onthe outboard side ofthe driver’s seat.

269

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Hatchback shown. Sedan similar

270

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 349.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 181.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 181.

271

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

272

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

273

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handleinside the vehicle. Itis located on thelower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift upon the secondary hood release lever, locatedunder the front center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop from itsretainer located on the underside of the hood.

274

4. Securely place the hood prop into the slot onthe inner fender.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood propfrom the slot in the inner fender and return theprop to its retainer. Lower the hood 12 inches(30 cm) above the vehicle and release it so it fullylatches. Check to make sure the hood is closedand repeat the process if necessary.

275

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, here is what you will see:

Automatic shown, Manual similar

276

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 281.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 277.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 277.

D. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 299 and HydraulicClutch on page 286.

E. Automatic Transaxle Dipstick. See AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 283.

F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 292.

G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 361.

H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 297.

I. Battery. See Battery on page 303.J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 298.

Engine Oil

If the oil pressure lightcomes on, it meansyou need to check theengine oil levelright away.

The oil pressure light is on the instrument panelcluster for sedans. See Oil Pressure Light onpage 185. For hatchbacks, the oil pressure light ison the Secondary Information Center (SIC).See Oil Pressure Light on page 185. You shouldcheck the engine oil level regularly; this is anadded reminder.

277

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 276for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip downand check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the lower hole at the tip of thedipstick (B), you will need to add at least onequart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 368.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper hole (A) that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 276for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range, betweenthe holes on the dipstick. Push the dipstick allthe way back in when you are through.

278

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

279

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine OilIf any one of these is true for you, use the shorttrip/city maintenance schedule:

• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This isparticularly important when outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling, such asfrequent driving in stop-and-go traffic.

• You frequently use a carrier on top of yourvehicle.

• The vehicle is used for delivery service,police, taxi, or other commercial application.

Driving under these conditions causes engine oilto break down sooner. If any one of these istrue for your vehicle, then you need to change theoil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or3 months, whichever occurs first.

If none of them is true, use the long trip/highwaymaintenance schedule. Change the oil andfilter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months,whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with afully warmed engine under highway conditions willcause engine oil to break down slower.

280

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 276 for more information on location.

281

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the engine air cleaner/filter every15,000 miles (25 000 km) and replace it every30,000 miles (50 000 km). If you are drivingin dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the engine air cleaner/filter remove thefilter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filterto release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Remove the screws and lift off the cover.

2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

3. Put the cover back on tightly and tightenthe screws.

See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 374 for replacement intervals.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

282

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check Automatic TransaxleFluidCheck your automatic transaxle fluid level at leasttwice a year. Add fluid if needed. See At LeastTwice a Year on page 389.

How to Check Automatic TransaxleFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage the transaxle. Too much can meanthat some of the fluid could come out and fallon hot engine or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause thetransaxle to overheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if you check the transaxlefluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is 158°Fto 176°F (70°C to 80°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

283

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The automatic transaxle dipstick is located towardthe front of the engine compartment, near thepower steering fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 276 for moreinformation on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push the dipstick back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, fluid shouldbe between MIN and MAX mark of the hotarea of the dipstick.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

284

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 396.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the area betweenthe two dimples in the hot range on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 396.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

Manual Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle tothe dealership service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible. See Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 396for the proper fluid to use.

285

Hydraulic ClutchThere is one reservoir for both the brake and thehydraulic clutch fluid. See Brakes on page 299for more information.

The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoiris filled with hydraulic fluid.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often you should check the fluid level inyour master cylinder reservoir and for the properfluid. See Part B: Owner Checks and Serviceson page 389 and Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 396.

How to Check and Add Fluid

To check the fluid level, look on the side of thereservoir. If the fluid reaches the MAX (A) mark onthe reservoir, the fluid level is correct. If the fluiddoes not reach the MIN (B) mark on the reservoir,then fluid needs to be added. The reservoir islocated near the back of the engine compartmenton the driver’s side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 276 formore information on location.

286

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 290.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

287

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 396 for more information.

288

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surge tank is located in therear of the engine compartment on the driver’s sideof the vehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 276 for more information onlocation.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

To check the engine coolant, the vehicle must beon a level surface. When your engine is cold,the coolant level should be between theMaximum (A) and Minimum (B) marks on thecoolant surge tank. The level rises at engineoperation temperature and drops again when theengine cools down.

289

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surgetank, but only when the engine is cool. If thecoolant surge tank is empty, a special fillprocedure is necessary. See Engine Overheatingon page 290 for instructions on “How to AddCoolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 167.

290

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning, but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

291

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood, but to getservice help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling Fan

292

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.To check the engine coolant, the vehicle shouldbe parked on a level surface. Make sure thatthe air conditioning is turned off.

The coolant level should be between the Minimumand Maximum marks on the coolant surge tankwhen the engine is cool. If it is not, you may havea leak at the pressure cap or in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, orsomewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine is overheating, thefan should be running. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

293

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not between theMinimum and Maximum marks, add a 50/50mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be surethe cooling system, including the coolant surgetank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.See Engine Coolant on page 287 for moreinformation.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

294

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and a proper coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure capand upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left to be vented outthe discharge hose.

295

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture to the Maximum mark on thecoolant surge tank. Wait about five minutes,then check to see if the level is below themark. If the level is below the Maximum mark,add additional coolant to bring the level upto the mark. Repeat this procedure untilthe level remains constant at the Maximummark for at least five minutes.

296

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the level islower than the Maximum mark, add more ofthe proper mixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches the mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.See your dealer, if necessary.

Power Steering Fluid

When to Check Power Steering FluidThe power steering fluid reservoir is located towardthe front of the engine compartment on the driver’sside of the vehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 276 for reservoir location.

It is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

297

How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the key off and let the engine compartmentcool down.

The level should be between the MIN (B) andMAX (A) marks on the reservoir. If the level dropsbelow the MIN (B) mark, add power steeringfluid. Do not overfill the reservoir and remember toreplace the cap tightly when you are finishedand clean up any spilled fluid.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 396. Always use the proper fluid. Failure touse the proper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Ifyou will be operating your vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 276for reservoir location.

298

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your vehicle has onereservoir for both thebrake and clutchhydraulic systems. It isfilled with DOT-3brake fluid. See EngineCompartmentOverview on page 276for the location ofthe reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake or clutch system. If it is, you shouldhave your brake/clutch system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later your brakes will notwork well, or will not work at all.

299

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake and/or clutchhydraulic system.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 164.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 396.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

300

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 349.

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and may haverear drum brakes or rear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

301

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

If you have rear drum brakes, they do not havewear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brakerubbing noise, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drumsshould be removed and inspected each timethe tires are removed for rotation or changing.When you have the front brake pads replaced,have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

See Brake System Inspection on page 395.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign of braketrouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a moderate brake stop, yourdisc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely makea moderate or heavier stop, then your brakesmight not adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,then — very carefully — make a few moderatebrake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),so your brakes will adjust properly.

If your brake pedal goes down farther thannormal, your rear drum brakes may needadjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmlyapplying the brakes a few times.

302

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system — for example, when yourbrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 276 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 304 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

303

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

304

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before settingthe parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Findthe positive (+) and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. Your vehicle’spositive (+) terminal is located under ared tethered cap on the battery. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 276 for moreinformation on location.Flip the cap up to access the positive (+)terminal.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

305

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdon’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

306

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal on thevehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the otherend of thenegative (−) cable atleast 18 inches(45 cm) away fromthe dead battery,but not near engineparts that move.

The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

307

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (–) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminal cap to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

308

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in an accident,the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustmentto the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if itis difficult to see the lane markers (for horizontalaim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high-beamheadlamps at you (for vertical aim).

If you believe your headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommend that you take the vehicleto your dealer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 317.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

309

Headlamps (Hatchback)To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 274 for more information.

2. Remove the five screws from top of theradiator grille.

3. Remove the radiator grille.

4. Remove the three bolts from the headlampassembly.

5. Remove the headlamp assembly.

6. Disconnect the wiring harness connector fromthe rear of the bulb.

7. Remove the headlamp cap.

310

8. Release the spring that retains the bulb byloosing the screw.

9. Remove the old bulb.

10. Install the new bulb.

11. Install the bulb retaining spring.

12. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to install theheadlamp assembly.

Headlamps (Sedan)To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:


2. Remove the three bolts from the headlampassembly.

3. Remove the headlamp assembly.

4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector fromthe rear of the bulb.

5. Remove the headlamp cap.

311

6. Release the spring that retains the bulb.

7. Remove the old bulb.


9. Install the bulb retaining spring.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to install theheadlamp assembly.

Front Turn Signal and ParkingLamps (Hatchback)To replace a front turn signal or parking lampbulb, do the following:1. Remove the radiator grille and the headlamp

assembly. See Steps 2 through 5 underHeadlamps (Hatchback) on page 310 orHeadlamps (Sedan) on page 311 forinstructions on how to remove the headlampassembly.

2. Turn the front turn signal bulb socketcounterclockwise.

312

3. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of thelamp housing.

4. Press the bulb inward and turn itcounterclockwise to remove it from the bulbsocket.

5. Install the new bulb into the socket bypressing it in and turning it clockwise.

6. Install the socket into the lamp housing byturning it clockwise.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to install theassembly.

Front Turn Signal and ParkingLamps (Sedan)To replace a front turn signal or parking lampbulb, do the following:


2. Remove the headlamp assembly. See Steps 2through 4 under Headlamps (Hatchback) onpage 310 or Headlamps (Sedan) on page 311for instructions on how to remove theheadlamp assembly.

3. Turn the front turn signal bulb socketcounterclockwise.

4. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of thelamp housing.

5. Press the bulb inward and turn itcounterclockwise to remove it from the bulbsocket.

313

6. Install the new bulb into the socket bypressing it in and turning it clockwise.

7. Install the socket into the lamp housing byturning it clockwise.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 2 under Headlamps(Hatchback) on page 310 or Headlamps(Sedan) on page 311 to install the assembly.

Turn Signal Lamps (Side)To replace a side turn signal bulb, do the following:


2. See Steps 2 through 5 under Headlamps(Hatchback) on page 310 or Headlamps(Sedan) on page 311 to access the side turnsignal lamps.

3. Remove the side turn signal lamp assemblyby pulling it forward.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.

5. Remove the bulb from the lamp housing bypulling the bulb straight out of the socket.

6. Install the new bulb into the bulb socket bypushing it in and rotating the bulb socketclockwise.

7. Push the side turn signal lamp assembly backinto its original position.

314

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) (Sedan)To replace a CHMSL bulb on the hatchback,contact your dealer.

To replace a CHMSL bulb on the sedan do thefollowing:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 98 formore information.

2. Remove the two screws and the lamphousing. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector before removing the lamp housing.

3. Remove the five screws and the reflectorassembly.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out ofthe bulb holder.


6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.

315

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up LampsTo replace a taillamp, turn signal lamp, stoplamp,or back-up bulb, do the following:

1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk onpage 98 or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 100for more information.

2. Remove the two screws and the lampassembly.

3. Remove the bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressingthe bulb and turning it counterclockwise.

5. Install the appropriate bulb into the socket.6. Replace the bulb socket into the lamp

housing. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto secure.

7. Reverse Step 2 to reinstall the lamp housing.

Hatchback

Sedan

316

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws holding each of thelicense plate lamps.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the

license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up 94535571

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) 94535587

Headlamps 94535548

Front Parking/Turn Signal(Hatchback) 94535574

Front Parking/Turn Signal(Sedan) 94535574

Side Turn Signal (Hatchback) 94535587

Side Turn Signal (Sedan) 94535587

Stoplamp/Taillamps 94535574

Turn Signal Lamps 94535572

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

317

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade Check”under Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 389 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways.

Here is how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiperblade off the arm.

3. Install a new blade by reversingSteps 1 and 2.

318

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 248.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 326.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

319

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger car tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

Passenger Car Tire Example

320

(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based onthree performance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 332.

(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressure seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 326 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 248.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.See Compact Spare Tire on page 344 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 335.

Compact Spare Tire Example

321

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.See Compact Spare Tire on page 344 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 248.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 326.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger car tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U. S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 70% as high as it is wide.

322

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial ply construction; the letter Dmeans diagonal or bias ply construction; and theletter B means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and the speed rating of atire. The load range represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed a tire is certified tocarry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 326.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

323

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 248.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 248.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 248.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 248.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

324

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 326 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 248.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 329.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 332.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 248.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 248.

325

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 248. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort, never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 344.

326

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 329and Wheel Replacement on page 333 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See Part A:Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 374.

327

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in the tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on thetire and loading information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 248 for an example ofthe tire and loading information label and where itis located on your vehicle. Make certain that allwheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel NutTorque” under Capacities and Specifications onpage 368.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause an accident.When you change a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if needed, to get all the rust ordirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 336.

328

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

329

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires thatare the same size, brand, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial and bias-beltedtires) as your vehicle’s original tires. This way, yourvehicle will continue to have tires that aredesigned to give the same performance andvehicle safety, during normal use, as the originaltires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 320for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 344.

330

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 248,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a differentsize than your original equipment wheels andtires, this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.

Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systemssuch as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, andelectronic stability control, the performance ofthese systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 330 andAccessories and Modifications on page 264 foradditional information.

331

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum selection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the Unites States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (11⁄2) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction — AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

332

Temperature — A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

333

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 336 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a new GMoriginal equipment wheel.

334

Tire ChainsNotice: Use tire chains only where legal andonly when you must. Use only SAE Class “S”type chains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the front tires and tightenthem as tightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowly and follow thechain manufacturer’s instructions. If you canhear the chains contacting your vehicle, stopand retighten them. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chains on will damageyour vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But if you should everhave a blowout, here are a few tips about what toexpect and what to do:If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheelfirmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing a flattire. If it is used for anything else, you orothers could be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. Use the jackprovided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

335

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever

in PARK (P), or shift a manualtransaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When you have a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

336

The following information will tell you how to usethe jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe compact spare tire and tools you will needare located in the trunk.

A. JackB. Wheel Wrench

C. Jack HandleD. Screwdriver

337

1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk onpage 98 or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 100for more information.

2. Lift the trim cover.

3. Remove the foam tray.

4. Remove the jack, the jack handle and thewheel wrench from the foam tray.

5. Turn the retainer counterclockwise andremove it from the compact spare.

6. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 344 for more information.

338

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, loosen the

four plastic caps by hand or by using thewheel wrench. The plastic nuts do not comeoff of the cover.

2. Remove the wheel cover using the flat end ofthe jack handle. Pry along the edge of thewheel cover until it comes off.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

Hatchback

339

4. Locate the notch in the frame near eachwheel which the jack head fits in.

5. Position the jack and raise the jack head untilit fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle’sframe nearest the flat tire.

6. Put the compact spare tire near you.

7. Insert the jack handle into the jack and thewheel wrench onto the end of the jack handle.

Sedan

340

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe compact spare tire to fit underneath thewheel well.

9. Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning themcounterclockwise.

10. Remove the flat tire.

341

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

11. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

12. Place the compact spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

342

13. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end ofthe nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nutby hand clockwise until the wheel is heldagainst the hub.

14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheelwrench counterclockwise. Lower the jackcompletely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 368for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 368 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

15. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coverin the cargo area until you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.

343

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store a flat or compact spare tire and tools, dothe following:1. Store the flat tire or the compact spare in the

compact spare tire compartment.2. Secure the retainer.3. Store the tools securely in the foam tray and

place the tray back in the cargo area.4. Replace the trim cover.

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 344.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen your vehicle was new, it can lose airafter a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure your spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 50 mph (80 km/h), so you can finish yourtrip and have your full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. Of course, it is best to replaceyour spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.Your spare will last longer and be in good shapein case you need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

344

Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix your compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

345

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from your GM dealerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

346

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

347

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required.

348

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. GM-approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 353.Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleumbased, or that contain acid or abrasives. Allcleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on the surface, or theycould stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 349.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. GM-approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 353.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

349

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

350

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damage thealuminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Neverdrive a vehicle equipped with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

351

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your GM dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

352

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish EnhancerRemoves dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot LifterQuickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

353

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in your VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your engine,specifications and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

354

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 82.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, onefor each headlamp, in the fuse block. An electricaloverload will cause the lamps to turn off. If thishappens, have your headlamp wiring checkedright away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motoroverheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If the overload iscaused by some electrical problem and not snow,etc., be sure to get it fixed.

355

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse block protect thepower windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuituntil the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links inthe wiring itself.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

There are spare fuses provided in the enginecompartment fuse block. If you ever have a problemon the road and do not have a spare fuse, you canborrow one that has the same amperage. Just picka feature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout — like the radio or cigarette lighter — anduse its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace itas soon as you can.

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: theinstrument panel fuse block and the enginecompartment fuse block.

There is a fuse puller located on the enginecompartment fuse block. It can be used to easilyremove fuses from the fuse block.

356

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located on theend of the instrument panel on the driver’sside of the vehicle.

To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door bypulling the door out.

To reinstall the door, first insert the rear edge ofthe fuse panel door, then push the front of the doorinto the end of the instrument panel to secure it.

Hatchback

Sedan

357

Fuses Usage

AUX LTR Auxiliary Cigarette Lighter

HORN,REAR/FOG Horn, Rear Fog Lamps

LTR Cigarette Lighter

STOP Stop Lamp

RADIO, CLK Audio, Clock

CLSTR,HAZRD

Instrument Panel Cluster, HazardFlasher

TRN/SIG Turn Signal

DR/LCK Door Lock, Remote Keyless Entry

CLSTR, CLK Instrument Panel Cluster, Clock

ECM, TCM Engine Control Module (ECM),Transaxle Control Module (TCM)

BCK/UP Back-Up Lamp

WPR, WSWA Wiper, Washer

ECM, TCM Engine Control Module (ECM),Transmission Control Module (TCM)

ENG FUSE Engine Fuse

ALTERNATOR Alternator

Hatchback

358

Fuses Usage

HVAC HVAC Blower

AIRBAG 1 Airbag 1

BLANK Not Used

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

DIODE (ABS) Anti-lock Brake System Diode

AIRBAG 2 Airbag 2

BLANK Not Used

CLK, RADIO Clock, Audio

Fuses Usage

SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module

WIPER Windshield Wiper Switch,Windshield Wiper Motor

CLUSTER Instrument Panel Cluster, BrakeSwitch, Anti-theft Mode

T/SIG Turn Signal, Hazard Switch

EMS2 Stoplamp Switch

Sedan

359

Fuses Usage

EMS1Engine Room Fuse Block, RearHO2S, Transaxle Control Module,VSS, Fuel Pump

STOP LAMP Brake Switch

CIGAR Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary PowerOutlet

AUDIO/CLOCK Radio, Clock

OBD On-Board Diagnostics, Immobilizer

ROOM LAMP Trunk Lamp, Trunk Open Switch,Cluster, Dome Lamp

DEFOGGER Rear Defogger

SUNROOF Sunroof Module (Option)

DRL Daytime Running Lamps

Fuses Usage

DOOR LOCK Door Lock/Unlock

B/UP LAMP Back-up Lamps

HORN Horn

ELEC MIRROR Mirror Control Switch, Dome Lamp,Air Conditioning Switch

AUDIO/RKERadio, Remote Keyless Entry,Clock, Power Mirror Unit, Anti-TheftModule

DEFOGMIRROR

Power Mirror Unit, Air ConditioningSwitch

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

BLANK Not Used

360

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located onthe driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 276for more information on location.

To access the fuses, pull out the top and bottomflaps to release the cover. To reinstall thecover, push the cover until it is secure.

Hatchback

Sedan

361

Fuses Usage

HI BEAM RT Passenger’s Side Headlamp High

DIODE (FOG) Fog Lamp Diode

Fuses Usage

HI BEAM LT Driver’s Side Headlamp High

BLANK Not Used

Hatchback

362

Fuses Usage

LOW BEAM RT Passenger’s Side Headlamp Low

ILLUM RT Parking Lamp Right Side,Illumination Circuit

LOW BEAM LT Driver’s Side Headlamp Low

ILLUM LT Driver’s Side Parking Lamp, LicensePlate Lamp

INT LTS Room Lamp

BLANK Not Used

DEFOG Defogger

S/ROOF Sunroof

ILLUM LAMPS Illumination Relay

HORN Horn

HEAD LAMPS Headlamps

FUEL Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

A/C Air Conditioning Compressor

FOG LAMPS Front Fog Lamp

HVACBLOWER

Heating, Ventilation, Air ConditioningBlower

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

I/P FUSEBATT. Instrument Panel Fuse Box

COOL FAN Radiator Fan

IGN 2 Ignition 2

BLANK Blank

IGN 1 Ignition 1

PWR WNDW Power Windows

SPARE Spare

363

Relays Usage

BLANK Not Used

COOLFAN LOW Cooling Fan Low

HEADLAMPS HI Headlamp High

HEAD LAMPSLOW Headlamp Low

PWR WNDW Power Window

FRT FOG Fog Lamp

Relays Usage

COOL FNCNTRL Cooling Fan Control

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

A/C COMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor

COOL FAN HI Cooling Fan High

ILLUM LAMPS Illumination Lamps

BLANK Not Used

364

Fuses Usage

BATT Instrument Panel Fuse Block

PK/LP LH Driver’s Side Parking Lamp,Taillamp

Fuses Usage

PK/LP RH Passenger’s Side Parking Lamp,Taillamp

IGN2/ST Ignition Switch

Sedan

365

Fuses Usage

ACC/IGN1 Ignition Switch

HAZARD Hazard Lamps, Theft-DeterrentSystem

H/L LOW RH Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed

H/L LOW LH Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp

FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps (Option)

FAN LOW Cooling Fan Low Speed

H/L HI High-Beam Headlamps

A/C COMP Air Conditioning Compressor(Option)

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

SPARE Spare

ABS Anti-lock Brake System (Option)

EMS2 LEGR Valve, HO2S, EVAP CanisterPurge Solenoid, CMP Sensor

P/WINDOW1 Power Window Switch (Option)

ECU Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module

SPARE Spare

EMS1Engine Control Module, Injector,Cooling Fan, Air ConditioningCompressor

SPARE Spare

366

Relays Usage

H/L LOWRELAY Low-Beam Headlamp Relay

FAN HI RELAY Cooling Fan High Speed Relay

FUEL PUMPRELAY Fuel Pump Relay

P/WINDOWRELAY Power Window Relay

PARK LAMPRELAY Parking Lamp Relay

FRT FOGRELAY Front Fog Lamps Relay

Relays Usage

H/L HI RELAY High-Beam Headlamp Relay

FAN LOWRELAY Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay

A/C RELAY Air Conditioning Relay (Option)

MAIN RELAY Main Relay

Misc. Usage

FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

367

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 396 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System 6.3 qt 6.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter 3.96 qt 3.75 L

Fuel Tank 11.9 gal 45.0 L

Transaxle, Automatic 6.2 qt 5.87 L

Transaxle, Manual 1.9 qt 1.8 L

Wheel Nut Torque 81 lb ft 110 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

1.6L L4 (L91) 6 Automatic andManual 0.039-0.043 inch (1.0-1.1 mm)

368

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® PartNumber

Passenger Compartment Filter 96539649 —

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96536694 —

Engine Oil Filter 96458873/96395221 —

Fuel Filter 96537170 —

Spark Plugs 96130723 IFR6E111

Windshield Wiper Blade- Hatchback

Driver’s Side 96497155 —

Passenger’s Side 96619022 —

Rear 96301840 —

Windshield Wiper Blade- Sedan

Driver’s Side 96648556 —

Passenger’s Side 96648561 —1NGK

369

Engine Drive Belt Routing

1.6L L4 Engine

370

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 372Introduction ............................................... 372Maintenance Requirements ........................ 372Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 372How This Section is Organized ................. 373Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services .... 374Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 374Selecting the Right Schedule ..................... 375Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..... 377Long Trip/Highway Scheduled

Maintenance .......................................... 384Part B: Owner Checks and Services ......... 389At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 389

At Least Once a Month ............................. 389At Least Twice a Year .............................. 389At Least Once a Year ............................... 390Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .... 394Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ............... 394Exhaust System Inspection ........................ 394Fuel System Inspection ............................. 395Engine Cooling System Inspection ............. 395Brake System Inspection ........................... 395Part D: Recommended Fluids

and Lubricants ....................................... 396Part E: Maintenance Record ...................... 398

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

371

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed inthis manual are necessary to keep your vehicle ingood working condition. Any damage caused byfailure to follow scheduled maintenance may not becovered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

372

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided intofive parts:“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”explains what to have done and how often.Some of these services can be complex, sounless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should let yourGM dealer’s service department do these jobs.Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supportedservice people that will perform the work usinggenuine GM parts.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. Ifyou have any doubt, have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 265.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 421.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells youwhat should be checked and when. It alsoexplains what you can easily do to help keep yourvehicle in good condition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains important inspections that your dealer’sservice department can perform for you.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some recommended products necessary tohelp keep your vehicle properly maintained. Theseproducts, or their equivalents, should be usedwhether you do the work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place foryou to record and keep track of the maintenanceperformed on your vehicle. Keep yourmaintenance receipts. They may be needed toqualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.

373

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesIn this part are scheduled maintenance serviceswhich are to be performed at the mileage intervalsspecified.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to keep your vehicle ingood working condition. But we do not know exactlyhow you will drive it. You may drive short distancesonly a few times a week. Or you may drive longdistances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Oryou may drive it to work, to do errands, or in manyother ways.

Because of the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs may vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services youshould have done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer for your serviceneeds, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service people will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedin Part D. Make sure whoever services yourvehicle uses these. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you oranyone else drives the vehicle.

These schedules are for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these onthe Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 248.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 266.

374

Selecting the Right ScheduleFirst you will need to decide which of thetwo schedules is right for your vehicle. Here ishow to decide which schedule to follow:

Short Trip/City DefinitionFollow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenanceif any one of these conditions is true for yourvehicle:

• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This isparticularly important when outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling, such asfrequent driving in stop-and-go traffic.

• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,police, taxi, or other commercial application.

One of the reasons you should follow this scheduleif you operate your vehicle under any of theseconditions is that these conditions cause engine oilto break down sooner.

Short Trip/City IntervalsEvery 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil andFilter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).

Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Inspection. Passenger CompartmentAir Filter Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): EngineAir Cleaner Filter Replacement. Spark PlugReplacement. EVAP System Service. PCV SystemService. Timing Belt Inspection. Brake/Clutch FluidChange (or 24 months, whichever occurs first).

Every 42,000 Miles (70 000 km): Engine Oil PanDrain Plug Washer Replacement.

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark PlugWire Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement.EVAP System Solenoid Valve Replacement.

Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel FilterReplacement.

Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): CoolingSystem Service.These intervals only summarize maintenanceservices. Be sure to follow the complete scheduledmaintenance on the following pages.

375

Long Trip/Highway DefinitionFollow this scheduled maintenance only if none ofthe conditions from the Short Trip/City ScheduledMaintenance are true. Do not use this scheduleif the vehicle is driven in a dusty area or used offpaved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedulefor these conditions.

Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine underhighway conditions will cause engine oil tobreak down slower.

Long Trip/Highway Intervals

Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil andFilter Change (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Inspection. Passenger CompartmentAir Filter Replacement. Drive Belt(s) Inspection.

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine AirCleaner Filter Replacement. Spark PlugReplacement. EVAP System Service. PCVSystem Service. Timing Belt Inspection.Brake/Clutch Fluid Change (or 24 months,whichever occurs first).

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Spark PlugWire Replacement. Timing Belt Replacement.EVAP System Solenoid Valve Replacement.

Every 90,000 Miles (150 000 km): Fuel FilterReplacement. Engine Oil Pan Drain Plug WasherReplacement.

Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): CoolingSystem Service.

These intervals only summarize maintenanceservices. Be sure to follow the complete scheduledmaintenance on the following pages.

376

Short Trip/City ScheduledMaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeatedafter 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the sameintervals for the life of this vehicle. The servicesshown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should berepeated at the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km) for the life of this vehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 389 and Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspections on page 394.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance be recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tirerotation. See Brake System Inspection onpage 395.

3,000 Miles (5 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.



❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)






377



❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. Ifyou drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,replace the filter. If vehicle is driven industy/dirty conditions, inspect filter at everyengine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 281 for more information.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).








❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +)



378




❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 281 for more information.


❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines, and EVAP

vent solenoid valve. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change brake/clutch fluid (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first).










❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

379
















380







❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Replace timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines.

Replace EVAP vent solenoid valve. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)













381













❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation

on page 327 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)



382







❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)












150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This

service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 287 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and neck. Pressure test the cooling systemand pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

383

Long Trip/Highway ScheduledMaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be repeatedafter 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the sameintervals for the life of this vehicle. The servicesshown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should berepeated at the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km) for the life of this vehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 389 and Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspections on page 394.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance be recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tirerotation. See Brake System Inspection onpage 395.

7,500 Miles (12 500 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every

12 months, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.





❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 281 for more information.



384

















385
















❑ Replace spark plug wires. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Replace timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines.

Replace EVAP vent solenoid valve. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)



386















❑ Replace engine oil pan drain plug washer.❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you

drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filtermay require replacement more often.

❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 281 for moreinformation.



387

❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission ControlService. (See footnote †.)

❑ Inspect drive belt(s).❑ Inspect timing belt.❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and EVAP







150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This

service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 287 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and neck. Pressure test the cooling systemand pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

388

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed in this part are owner checks and serviceswhich should be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure the safety, dependabilityand emission control performance of your vehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Part D.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendantto perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 277 forfurther details.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add the propercoolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 287 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 298 for further details.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect the tires and make sure the tiresare inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 326.

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.

389

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.(The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.)

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replaceblade inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat streak or miss areas of the windshield. Alsosee Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 350.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather more frequent applicationmay be required. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 396.

Manual Transaxle CheckIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. Have the system inspectedand repaired if needed.

Automatic Transaxle CheckCheck the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Fluid on page 283. A fluidloss may indicate a problem. Check the systemand repair if needed.

Hydraulic Clutch System CheckCheck the fluid level in the brake/clutch reservoir.See Hydraulic Clutch on page 286. A fluid lossin this system could indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired at once.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part D.

390

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondarylatch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood andbody door hinges, rear compartment, and anyfolding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use.More frequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment.

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 117if necessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start theengine in each gear. The starter should workonly in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thestarter works in any other position, your vehicleneeds service.On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift leverin NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal downhalfway and try to start the engine. The startershould work only when the clutch pedal ispushed down all the way to the floor. If thestarter works when the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down, your vehicle needsservice.

391

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 117 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, butdo not start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needsservice.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transaxle, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shift leveris in PARK (P).

• With a manual transaxle, the ignition shouldturn to LOCK only when you press the keyrelease button.

On all vehicles, the ignition key should come outonly in LOCK.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.It should only lock when turned to the right.

392

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

393

Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspectionsListed in this part are inspections and serviceswhich should be performed at least twice ayear (for instance, each spring and fall). Youshould let your dealer’s service departmentdo these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairsare completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services maybe found in a service manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 421.

Steering, Suspension and FrontDrive Axle Boot and Seal InspectionInspect the front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missingparts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectthe power steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Cleanand then inspect the drive axle boot seals fordamage, tears or leakage. Replace seals ifnecessary.

Exhaust System InspectionInspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect thebody near the exhaust system. Look for broken,damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as wellas open seams, holes, loose connections or otherconditions which could cause a heat build-up in thefloor pan or could let exhaust fumes into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 122.

394

Fuel System InspectionInspect the complete fuel system for damageor leaks.

Engine Cooling System InspectionInspect the hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed.Clean the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser. To help ensure properoperation, a pressure test of the cooling systemand pressure cap is recommended at least oncea year.

Brake System InspectionInspect the complete system. Inspect brake linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads forwear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspectdrum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspectother brake parts, including drums, wheelcylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Checkparking brake adjustment. You may need to haveyour brakes inspected more often if your drivinghabits or conditions result in frequent braking.

395

Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 277.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 287


Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

AutomaticTransaxle

Use only T-IV AutomaticTransmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925, inCanada 22689186). See AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 283.

ManualTransaxle

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,in Canada 89021807).

396


Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

ManualTransaxle Shift

Linkage

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,and Release

Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) or DielectricSilicone Grease (GM Part No.U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

397

Part E: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed theservice and any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

398

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


399

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


400

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 402Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 402Online Owner Center ................................. 405Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 406Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 406GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 407Roadside Assistance Program ................... 408Courtesy Transportation ............................. 411Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 414Collision Damage Repair ........................... 415

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 419Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 419Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 420Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 420Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 421

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

401

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).This is available from the vehicle registrationor title, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

402

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, you should file with the BBBAuto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage, and other factors.General Motors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

403

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibilityin the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

404

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

405

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available atits Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Chevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canadacan dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, theletter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

406

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries (ExceptPuerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required for yourvehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

407

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle. Ifyour vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership. Inthe U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

408

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good condition willbe covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

409

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximumof $50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receiptsand a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty,and the duration of the Base Warranty Coveragefor Canadian customers of the new Vehicle LimitedWarranty. However, any cost for parts and labor fornon-warranty repairs are the responsibility of thedriver.For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:• Your name, home address, and home

telephone number.• Telephone number of your location.• Location of the vehicle.• Model, year, color, and license plate number.• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion to useour service, it is added security while traveling foryou and your family. Remember, we are only aphone call away. U.S. customers call ChevroletRoadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers call1-800-268-6800.

410

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

411

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed whileyou wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GMhelps to minimize your inconvenience by providingseveral transportation options. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offer you one of thefollowing:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

412

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rentalvehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for anovernight warranty repair. Rental reimbursementwill be limited and must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you sign and complete arental agreement and meet state/provincial, local,and rental vehicle provider requirements.

Requirements vary and may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usage charges andmay also be responsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

413

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if the vehiclehas the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed,safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance, and the severity of a collision.

This information has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles and drivingsafety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do not recordsounds, such as conversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

414

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement ormanual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale value,and safety performance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

415

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle. Arecycled original equipment GM part, maybe an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

416

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 408 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

417

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

418

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

419

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you should immediatelynotify Transport Canada, in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors of Canada Limited. You may callthem at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

420

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your General Motorsdealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US +Processing Fee

421

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 US + Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 US + Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

422

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 264Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 148Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 83Additives, Fuel ............................................ 267Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 355Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 281Air Conditioning ........................................... 150Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 162Readiness Light .............................. 161, 176

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 414

Airbag System ............................................... 68Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 75Passenger Sensing System ....................... 77Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 82What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 75What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 76When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 73Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 71

Airbag System (cont.)AM-FM Radio ..................................... 188, 190Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 218Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 218Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 225Anti-Lock Brake, System

Warning Light .................................. 165, 180Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 350Care of Safety Belts ................................ 348Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 352Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 349Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 345Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 346Finish Care .............................................. 349Finish Damage ......................................... 352Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 348Leather .................................................... 347Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 351Tires ........................................................ 351Underbody Maintenance ........................... 352Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 353Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 349Weatherstrips ........................................... 348Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 350

423

Appearance Care (cont.)Ashtray(s) .................................................... 149Audio System(s) .......................................... 186

AM-FM Radio .................................. 188, 190Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 216Backglass Antenna ................................... 218Care of Your CD Player ........................... 217Care of Your CDs .................................... 217Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 218Radio with CD ......................................... 194Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 201Understanding Radio Reception ............... 217

Automatic TransaxleFluid ........................................................ 283Operation ................................................. 111

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 218Battery ........................................................ 303

Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .............. 148Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 239Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 225Emergencies ............................................ 227

Brake (cont.)Parking .................................................... 117System Inspection .................................... 395System Warning Light .............................. 164

Brakes ........................................................ 299Braking ....................................................... 224Braking in Emergencies ............................... 227Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 107Bulb Replacement ....................................... 309

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 315

Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps ............................. 312, 313

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 309Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 309Headlamps ...................................... 310, 311License Plate Lamps ................................ 317Replacement Bulbs .................................. 317Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps .............................. 316Turn Signal Lamps ................................... 314

Buying New Tires ........................................ 330

424

CCalifornia Fuel ............................................. 267California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 265Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 368Carbon Monoxide ....................... 98, 100, 122,

242, 259Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 348Your CD Player ........................................ 217Your CDs ................................................. 217

CD, MP3 ............................................ 208, 212Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) .................................. 315Center Rear Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 37Chains, Tire ................................................. 335Charging System Light ....................... 164, 180Check

Engine Light .................................... 168, 181Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 273Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 352Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 45Infants and Young Children ........................ 42Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ...... 52Older Children ........................................... 39

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 59Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 62Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 50

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 149Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 350Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 349Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 346Finish Care .............................................. 349Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 345Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 348Leather .................................................... 347Tires ........................................................ 351Underbody Maintenance ........................... 352Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 349Weatherstrips ........................................... 348Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 350

Climate Control System ............................... 150Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 155Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 154

Clock .................................................. 150, 176Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 286Collision Damage Repair ............................. 415

425

Compact Spare Tire .................................... 344Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 224Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 167Heater, Engine ......................................... 110Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 290

Cooling System ........................................... 292Cruise Control ............................................. 141Cruise Control Light .................................... 172Cupholder(s) ................................................ 127Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 411Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 406Customer Assistance Offices .................... 406Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 402GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 407Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 420Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 420Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 419Roadside Assistance Program .................. 408Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 421

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 146Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ....... 172Defensive Driving ........................................ 220Disc, MP3 .......................................... 208, 212Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 265Dome Lamp ................................................ 148Door

Ajar Light ........................................ 173, 186Central Door Unlocking System ................. 95Door Ajar Reminder ................................... 96Locks ......................................................... 94Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 96

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 25Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 233City .......................................................... 237Defensive ................................................. 220Drunken ................................................... 221Freeway ................................................... 238Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 240In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 234Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 248Winter ...................................................... 242

426

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 355Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 361Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 356Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 355Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 357Power Windows and Other

Power Options ...................................... 356Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 355

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 281Battery ..................................................... 303Check and Service Engine

Soon Light ................................... 168, 181Coolant .................................................... 287Coolant Heater ......................................... 110Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 167Cooling System Inspection ....................... 395Drive Belt Routing .................................... 370Engine Compartment Overview ................ 276Exhaust ................................................... 122Oil ........................................................... 277Overheating ............................................. 290Starting .................................................... 109

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 414Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 38Exterior Lamps ............................................ 145

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 281Finish Damage ............................................ 352Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 218Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 135Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 138Flat Tire ...................................................... 335Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 336Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 344Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 283Manual Transaxle ..................................... 285Power Steering ........................................ 297Windshield Washer .................................. 298

Fog Lamp Light .................................. 172, 186Fog Lamps .................................................. 147Fuel ............................................................ 266

Additives .................................................. 267California Fuel .......................................... 267Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 272

427

Fuel (cont.)Filling Your Tank ...................................... 269Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 268Gage ....................................................... 173Gasoline Octane ...................................... 266Gasoline Specifications ............................ 266Low Warning Light ................................... 174System Inspection .................................... 395

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 361Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 356Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 357Windshield Wiper ..................................... 355

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 167Fuel ......................................................... 173Speedometer ........................................... 160Tachometer .............................................. 160

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 266Specifications ........................................... 266

Glove Box ................................................... 127GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 407

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 135Head Restraints ............................................ 12Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 309Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 355Headlamps ......................................... 310, 311

Bulb Replacement .................................... 309Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 146Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 138Front Turn Signal and

Parking Lamps ............................. 312, 313Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 309High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 138On Reminder ........................................... 145Turn Signal Lamps ................................... 314

Heater ......................................................... 150Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9Highbeam On Light ..................................... 172Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 240Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 240Hold Mode Light ................................. 166, 181Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 273Release ................................................... 274

428

Horn ............................................................ 136How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 24Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 286

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 108Immobilizer .................................................. 106Immobilizer Operation .................................. 106Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 42Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 326Inspection

Brake System .......................................... 395Engine Cooling System ............................ 395Exhaust System ....................................... 394Fuel System ............................................ 395Part C - Periodic Maintenance ................. 394Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal .............................. 394Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 132Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 147Cluster ..................................................... 158

JJump Starting .............................................. 304

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 90Keys ............................................................. 88

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 320Lamps

Dome ....................................................... 148Exterior .................................................... 145Fog .......................................................... 147Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .............. 148

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 52

License Plate Lamps ................................... 317Liftgate ........................................................ 100Light

Airbag Readiness ............................ 161, 176Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...... 165, 180Brake System Warning ............................. 164

429

Light (cont.)Charging System ............................. 164, 180Cruise Control .......................................... 172Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............ 172Door Ajar ........................................ 173, 186Fog Lamp ....................................... 172, 186Highbeam On .......................................... 172Hold Mode ...................................... 166, 181Low Fuel Warning .................................... 174Malfunction Indicator ....................... 168, 181Oil Pressure .................................... 171, 185Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 162Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

(Hatchback) .......................................... 178Safety Belt Reminder ...................... 161, 176Safety Belt Reminder Tone ...................... 161

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 248Lockout Protection ......................................... 97Locks

Central Door Unlocking System ................. 95Door .......................................................... 94Lockout Protection ..................................... 97Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 96

Long Trip/Highway ScheduledMaintenance ............................................ 384

Loss of Control ........................................... 232

Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 174Lumbar

Manual Controls .......................................... 9

MMaintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ...... 369Maintenance Schedule

At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 389At Least Once a Month ............................ 389At Least Once a Year .............................. 390At Least Twice a Year .............................. 389Brake System Inspection .......................... 395Engine Cooling System Inspection ........... 395Exhaust System Inspection ...................... 394Fuel System Inspection ............................ 395How This Section is Organized ................ 373Introduction .............................................. 372Long Trip/Highway Scheduled

Maintenance ......................................... 384Maintenance Requirements ...................... 372Part A - Scheduled Maintenance

Services ............................................... 374Part B - Owner Checks and Services ...... 389Part C - Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ........................................... 394

430

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ............................................. 396Part E - Maintenance Record ................... 398Selecting the Right Schedule ................... 375Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..... 377Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection .............. 394Using ....................................................... 374Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 372

Malfunction Indicator Light .................. 168, 181Manual Lumbar Controls ................................. 9Manual Seats .................................................. 8Manual Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 285Operation ................................................. 115

Manual Windows ......................................... 102Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 124Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 126Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 126Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 124Outside Power Mirror ............................... 125

MP3 ................................................... 208, 212MyGMLink.com ............................................ 405

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 107Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 369

OOdometer .................................................... 160Odometer, Trip ............................................ 160Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 230Oil

Engine ..................................................... 277Pressure Light ................................. 171, 185

Older Children, Restraints ............................. 39Online Owner Center ................................... 405Other Warning Devices ................................ 136Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 154Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 148Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 126Heated Mirrors ......................................... 126Manual Mirrors ......................................... 124Power Mirror ............................................ 125

Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

431

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 352Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 118Shifting Out of ......................................... 119

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 117Over Things That Burn ............................ 121

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 120Part A - Scheduled Maintenance

Services ................................................... 374Part B - Owner Checks and Services .......... 389Part C - Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ............................................... 394Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ................................................ 396Part E - Maintenance Record ...................... 398Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 162Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

(Hatchback) ............................................. 178Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 155Passenger Sensing System ........................... 77Passing ....................................................... 230

PowerAccessory Outlet(s) .................................. 148Electrical System ..................................... 356Steering Fluid .......................................... 297Windows .................................................. 102

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 38

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 23

RRadios ........................................................ 186

AM-FM Radio .................................. 188, 190Care of Your CD Player ........................... 217Care of Your CDs .................................... 217Radio with CD ......................................... 194Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 201Understanding Reception ......................... 217

Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 96Rear Seat Operation .............................. 13, 15Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 34Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 140

432

Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 124Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 257Remote Keyless Entry System ...................... 90Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ..... 91Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 339Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 337Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 317Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 420General Motors ........................................ 420United States Government ....................... 419

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 84Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 33Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 408Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 248Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 370Running the Engine While Parked ............... 122

SSafety Belt

Pretensioners ............................................. 38Reminder Light ................................ 161, 176Reminder Tone ........................................ 161

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 348Center Rear Passenger Position ................ 37Driver Position ........................................... 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 24Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 23Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 34Right Front Passenger Position .................. 33Safety Belt Extender .................................. 38Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 33Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 19Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 32

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9Head Restraints ......................................... 12Manual ........................................................ 8

433

Seats (cont.)Manual Lumbar ............................................ 9Rear Seat Operation ........................... 13, 15Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10

Secondary Information Center (SIC) ............ 175Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position ..................................... 59Right Front Seat Position ........................... 62

Selecting the Right Schedule,Maintenance ............................................ 375

Service ........................................................ 264Accessories and Modifications .................. 264Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 266California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 265Doing Your Own Work ............................. 265Engine Soon Light ........................... 168, 181Publications Ordering Information ............. 421

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 82Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 351Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 118Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 119Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ........ 377

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 32Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 137Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 344Installing .................................................. 339Removing ................................................ 337Storing ..................................................... 344

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 368Speedometer ............................................... 160Starting Your Engine ................................... 109Steering ...................................................... 227Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ................. 394Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 216Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 136Storage Areas ............................................. 126

Cupholder(s) ............................................ 127Glove Box ................................................ 127Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............ 127

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 247Sun Visors .................................................. 103Sunroof ....................................................... 128

434

TTachometer ................................................. 160Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-upLamps .................................................. 316

Theft-Deterrent System ................................ 103Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 103

Immobilizer .............................................. 106Immobilizer Operation .............................. 106

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 136Time ........................................................... 150Tires ........................................................... 319

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 350Buying New Tires ..................................... 330Chains ..................................................... 335Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 336Cleaning .................................................. 351Compact Spare Tire ................................. 344Different Size ........................................... 331If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 335Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 326Inspection and Rotation ............................ 327Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 339Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 339Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 337

Tires (cont.)Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 344Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 320Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 323Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 332Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 333Wheel Replacement ................................. 333When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 329

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 257Towing a Trailer ....................................... 259Your Vehicle ............................................. 257

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 283Fluid, Manual ........................................... 285

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 111Transaxle Operation, Manual ....................... 115Trip Odometer ............................................. 160Trunk ............................................................ 98Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 137Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 137

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 217Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 332

435

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 224Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 248Parking Your ............................................ 120Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 414

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 354Service Parts Identification Label .............. 354

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 154Visors .......................................................... 103

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 157Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 135Other Warning Devices ............................ 136Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 333Different Size ........................................... 331Replacement ............................................ 333

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 50Windows ..................................................... 101

Manual ..................................................... 102Power ...................................................... 102

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 140Washer Fluid ........................................... 298Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 318Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 350Wiper Fuses ............................................ 355Wipers ..................................................... 138

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 140Winter Driving ............................................. 242

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 372

436

2007 chevrolet aveo owner manual m - vaden gmpp chevrolet aveo owner manual m 1. headlamp aiming...

Documents